Nortel Networks Circuit Card инструкция обслуживания

Nortel Communi cation Server 1000 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 4.5 Circuit Card Description and Installation Document Number: 553-3001-211 Document Release: Standard 3.00 Date: August 2005 Y ear Publish FCC TM Copyright © Nor tel Networks Limited 2005 All Rights Reserved Produced in Canada Information is subject to change without notic[...]

[...]

Page 3 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 4 Revision history August 2005 Standard 3.00. This document is up-issued to support Commun ication Server 1000 Release 4.5. September 2004 Standard 2.00. This document is up-issued for Commu nication Server 1000 Release 4.0. October 2003 Standard 1.00. This document is a new NTP for Successio[...]

Page 4 of 906 Revision history 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 5 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 18 Contents LIst of procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Applicable systems . . . . [...]

Page 6 of 906 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Acceptance tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 [...]

Contents Page 7 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC414 Network card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 QPC441 3-Port Extender cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 QPC559, QPC560 Loo p Signaling Trunk card s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 QPC528 CO/[...]

Page 8 of 906 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Front panel connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Contents Page 9 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/P RI2 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Ph[...]

Page 10 of 906 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT6D80 MSDL card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 [...]

Contents Page 11 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Upgrading systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards . . . . . . . . 527 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Introduction .[...]

Page 12 of 906 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Cont[...]

Contents Page 13 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 NTAG26 XMFR card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6[...]

Page 14 of 906 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Ph[...]

Contents Page 15 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787 Download operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 16 of 906 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Software description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 Hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Contents Page 17 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuring the QSDI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882 The TDS/DTR card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885 Conten[...]

Page 18 of 906 Contents 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 19 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 20 LIst of procedures Procedure 1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Procedure 2 Testing conference cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Procedure 3 Testing digitone receiver cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9[...]

Page 20 of 906 LIst of procedures 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Procedure 11 Connecting to the MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Procedure 12 Connecting two or more lineside T1 cards to the MMI terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Procedure 13 Connecting two or more LEIs[...]

Page 21 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 26 About this document This document is a global document. Co ntact your system supplier or your Nortel representative to verify that th e hardware and software described are supported in your area. Subject This document outlines the functions , specifications, applications, and operation of [...]

Page 22 of 906 About this document 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 information about system messages, see the Software Input/Output: System Messages (553-3001-411). Note on legacy products and relea ses This NTP contains information about sy stems, components, and features that are compatible with Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 4.5[...]

About this document Page 23 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation System migration When particular Meridian 1 systems are upg raded to run CS 1000 Release 4.5 software and configured to include a Signaling Server, they become CS 1000M systems. Table 1 lists each Meridian 1 system that supports an upgrade path to a CS 1000M system . For m[...]

Page 24 of 906 About this document 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Conventions Terminology In this document, the followin g syst ems are referred to generically as “system”: • Communication Server 1000S (C S 1000S) • Communication Server 1000M (CS 1000M) • Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E) •M e r i d i a n 1 The following sys[...]

About this document Page 25 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Related information This section lists information so urces that relate to this document . NTPs The following NTPs are referenced in this document: • Meridian L ink ISDN/AP G eneral Guide (553-2901-100) • Spares Planning (553-3 001-153) • Equipment Identification (55[...]

Page 26 of 906 About this document 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 CD-ROM To obtain Nortel document ation on CD -RO M, contact your Nortel customer representative.[...]

Page 27 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 78 Overview Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Line cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 [...]

Page 28 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Line cards The following line cards are designed using th e Intelligent Per ipheral Equipment (IPE) arch itecture and are recommended for use in all new system designs. Each of the line cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Table 2 lists the line card characteristics. Ta b l[...]

Overview Page 29 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT1R20 Off-Premise Stati on Analog Line card The NT1R20 Off-Premise St ation (OPS) Analog Line card is an intelligent eight-channel analog line card designed to be used with 2-w ire analog terminal equipment such as anal og (500/2500-type) tel ephones and analog modems. Each line has[...]

Page 30 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT8D09 analog message wai ting line card The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is an i ntelligent 16-channel analog line card designed to be used with 2-wire terminal equipment such as analog (500/2500-ty pe) telephones, modems, an d key systems. This card can also provide a high-[...]

Overview Page 31 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation When installing line cards, follow these general procedures: • Configure the jumpers and switch es on the line card (if any) to meet system needs. • Install the line card into the selected slot. • Install the cable that connects th e backplane connector on the IPE module to the[...]

Page 32 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • configure the card according to inst ructions issued by the system • report back to the system information such as car d identificat ion (type, vintage, and serial number), fi rmware version, and programmed configuration status) Intelligent Peripher al Equipment IPE line cards all[...]

Overview Page 33 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • ringing signal on/off • message waiting lamp on/off Maintenance data is data relating to the configurat ion and operation of the IPE card, and is carried on the card LAN link. Some e xamples of maintena nce data include: • polling • reporting of self-test status • CP init[...]

Page 34 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 2 Typical IPE analog line card architecture Input/ output interface control Codec PCM Micro- controller DS-30X interface 5.12 MHz clock Tx PCM Async card LAN link Front panel LED Card LAN interface Tip Ring Codec PCM Line interface unit power Rx PCM 1 kHz frame sync Card slot add[...]

Overview Page 35 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation DS-30X loops The line interfaces provided by the line cards connect to conventional 2-wire (tip and ring) line facilities. IPE anal og line cards conv ert the inco ming analog voice and signaling in formation to digit al form and rou te it to the Call Server over DS-30X network loops[...]

Page 36 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 DS-30Y network loops extend between controll er cards and superloop network cards in the Common Equipment (CE). Th ey function in a manner similar to DS-30X loop s. See Figure 5 on page 41 . A DS-30Y loop carries the PCM timeslo t traffic of a DS-30X loop. Four DS-30Y network loop s for[...]

Overview Page 37 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation A card LAN link bus is common to all of the line/trunk card slots within an IPE module. This bu s is arranged in a master/s lave configuration where the controller card is the master and al l other cards are slaves. The module backplane provides each line/trunk card slot with a uniqu[...]

Page 38 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 4 Typical analog line inte rface unit block diagram CODEC 2-wire to 4-wire conversion Line interface and protection Message waiting Variable gain filters Impedance matching transformer Balancing Network Tip Ring DS-30X or SL-1 network loop Message waiting circuit –150V dc 553-6[...]

Overview Page 39 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Coder/Decoder circuit The Coder/Decoder (CODEC) performs Analog to Di gital (A/D) and Digital to Analog (D/A) conversion of the line analog voiceband signal to and from a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded and decoded using either the A-Law or the µ-Law compandin g algorit[...]

Page 40 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 (nominal) ri nging voltag e power supply is used to prevent switching of the relay during the current peak. This el iminates switching glitch es and extends the life of the switching relay. The off-hook detection circuit monito rs the current draw on the phone line. When the current dra[...]

Overview Page 41 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation voltage protection between th e TCM loop and the digita l line interf ace circuit. It also provides power for the digital telepho ne. To prevent undesirable side effects from occurring when the TCM loop interface cannot provide the proper si gnals on the digital phone line, the syste[...]

Page 42 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 the system controller to operate the digi tal line interface circ uits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signa ling messages from the controller and return incoming cal l status information to the controller over the DS-30X network loop. Analog line call operation The app[...]

Overview Page 43 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 6 Call connection sequence – near -end station receiving call 553-AAA1113 High- resistance loop Line card unit idle (2-way voice connection) Remarks Ground on tip/ battery on ring Signal/direction State System Ground on tip/ battery on ring High-resistance loop Ground on tip[...]

Page 44 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 7 Call connection sequence – near-end originating call 553-AAA1114 High- resistance loop Line card unit idle (2-way voice connection) Remarks Ground on tip/ battery on ring Signal/direction State System Ground on tip/ battery on ring High-resistance loop Ground on tip/ battery [...]

Overview Page 45 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Message wait ing Line cards that are equipped with the message waiting feature receive notification that a m essage is waiting across the C ard LAN link (IPE cards). On cards that drive a message waiting lig ht, the light is turned on by connecting the ring sid e of the telephone lin[...]

Page 46 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 causes the line card to revert th e battery and ground sign als to the normal stat e to signal that the call is complete. Hook Flash disconne ct supervision Hook flash disconnect supervisi on is only used for incoming calls that terminate at the terminal device (typi cally a Key system)[...]

Overview Page 47 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 8 Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision sequence System High- resistance loop Line card unit idle (2-way voice connection) Remarks Ground on tip/ battery on ring Signal/direction State Ground on tip/ battery on ring High- resistance loop Ground on tip/ battery on [...]

Page 48 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 9 Hook flash disconn ect supervision sequence High- resistance loop Line card unit idle (2-way voice connection) Remarks Ground on tip/ battery on ring Signal/direction State System No battery current drawn. Far-end station goes off hook and addresses (dials up) near-end station.[...]

Overview Page 49 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Call operation will be described by catego rizing the operation into th e following ma in states: • Idle (on-hook) • Incoming calls • Outgoing calls • Calls disconnected by the CO • Calls disconnected by the telephone Loop Start Mode In Loop Start mode , the A and B bits ha[...]

Page 50 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Outgoing calls During outgoing calls from the terminal equipment, a channel is seized when the station goes off-ho ok. This simulates a low- resistance loop across the ti p and ring leads toward the lineside T1 card, causing the lineside T1’s receive A bit to be changed from 0 to 1. T[...]

Overview Page 51 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • In order to detect distant end disc onnect for calls te rminating on the lineside T1 card, the hook flash feature within the SAL software must be enabled. • In order to detect distant end di sconnect for calls originating and terminating on the lineside T1 card, both the batter[...]

Page 52 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ground Start Mode In ground start mode, the A and B bits have the followi ng meaning: Transmit from LTI:A bit = Tip ground (0=grounded, 1=not grounded ) B bit = Ringing (0=on, 1=off) Receive to LTI: A bit = Loop (0=open, 1=closed) B bit = Ring ground (0=grounded, 1=not groun ded) When a[...]

Overview Page 53 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Incoming Calls Incoming calls to terminal equipm ent that is connected to the lineside T1 card can originate either from stations th at are local (served by the PBX), or remote (served through the publi c switched telephone network). To provide the ringing signal to the te rminal equ[...]

Page 54 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: By default, the SAL feature o pens the tip side fo r 750 m/s in loop start operation. This is configurable in 10 m/s increments. • In order to detect di stant end disconnect for calls originating on the lineside T1 card, the “battery revers al” feature within the SAL softwar[...]

Overview Page 55 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Ground Start Re strictions If the lineside T1 card is used in ground start mode, certain restrictions sho uld be considered. Because the system treat s the lineside T1 card as a standard loop start analog line card, the gro und start operation of the lineside T1 card has operational [...]

Page 56 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Distant end disconne ct restriction s If the SAL feature is not available in the CS 1000 Release 4.5 software, the lineside T1 card is not capable of indicating to the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) when a call has been term inated by the dist ant end. In this case, the lineside T1 ca[...]

Overview Page 57 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Voice frequency audio level The digital pad for lineside T1 card audio level is fixed for all ty pes of call connection (0 dB insertion loss in both directions ), and differs from the analog line. Audio level adj ustments, if required, must be ma de in the lineside T1 terminal equipm[...]

Page 58 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Nortel has tested line protection de vices from three manufacturers. See Table 6. Each manufacturer offers devices for protection of digit al as well as analog telephone lines. These devices are compatible wi th 66 type M1-50 sp lit blocks or equivalent. Consult the device manufact urer[...]

Overview Page 59 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation grounding connection requirements as describe d in System installation (553-3001-210). This requirement incl udes connecting the ground for the protection devices to the approved bu ild ing earth ground reference. Any variances to these grounding requirements cou ld limit the functio[...]

Page 60 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Each of the trunk cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Use Table 7 to help select the trunk card that will best m eet system needs. NT8D14 Univer sal Trunk card The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is an i ntelligent four-channel t runk card that is designed to be used in a vari[...]

Overview Page 61 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The universal trunk card also supports Music, Automatic Wake Up, and Direct Inward System Access (DISA) features. NT8D15 E&M Trunk card The NT8D15 E&M Trunk card is an in telligent fou r-channel trunk card that is designed to be used when connecting to the following types of [...]

Page 62 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 3 Install the cable that connects th e backplane connector on the IPE module to the module I/O panel. 4 Connect a 25-pair cable from the module I/O panel connector to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF). 5 Connect the trunk card output to the se lected terminal equipment at the MDF. 6 Con[...]

Overview Page 63 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Operation This section describes how trunk cards fit into the CS 1000 S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 architecture, the buses that carry signals to and from the trunk cards, and how they connect to termin al equipment. See Table 8 for IPE parameters. Host interface bus Cards based on the[...]

Page 64 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 11 Typical IPE trunk card architecture Input/ output interface control Codec PCM Micro- controller DS-30X interface 5.12 MHz clock Tx PCM Async card LAN link Front panel LED Card LAN interface Tip Ring Codec PCM Trunk interface unit power Rx PCM 1 kHz frame sync Card slot address[...]

Overview Page 65 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The switch communicates with IPE modules over two separate interfaces. Voice and signaling data are sent and received over DS-30X loops and maintenance data is sent over a separate asynchronous com munication link called the card LAN link. Signaling data is infor mation directly re l[...]

Page 66 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 DS-30X loops The interfaces provided by the line an d trunk cards connect to conventional 2-wire (tip an d ring) line f acilities. IPE analog line and trunk cards convert the incoming analog voice and signali ng information to digital fo rm, and route it to the Common Equipment (CE) CPU[...]

Overview Page 67 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation signaling data to the line card, it is sent as a 24-bit word divided amon g 24 successive DS-30X frames. DS-30Y network loops extend between controll er cards and superloop network cards in the common equipmen t, and function in a m anner similar to DS-30X loops. See Figure 13 on pag[...]

Page 68 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 13 Network conn ections to IPE modu les NT8D04 Superloop Network Card NT8D01 Controller Card NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card DS-30X DS-30Y loop NT8D37 IPE Module Common Equipment (Network) NT8D13 PE Module NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card QPC414 Network Card QPC659 Dual-Loop Peripheral Buff[...]

Overview Page 69 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation link is composed of two asynchronou s serial buses (called the Async card LAN link in Figure 11 on page 64 ). The outpu t bus is used by the controller for output of control data to the trunk card. The input bus is used by the controller for input of trunk card stat us data. A card L[...]

Page 70 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 trunk line through an impedance mat c hing and balance network. The trunk interface also includes th e logic necessary to place outgoing call signaling onto the trunk, or the logic to co nnect to special services such as recorded announcement and pag ing equipment. Figure 14 shows a typ[...]

Overview Page 71 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Variable gain filt ers Audio signals received from the analog phone trunk are passed through a low-pass A/D monolithic fi lter that limits the frequency spread of the input signal to a nominal 2 00–3400 Hz bandwidth. The audio signal is then appli ed to the input of the co dec. Aud[...]

Page 72 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board provides four bidirectional asynchronous serial ports for the system processor, and the QPC8 41 QSDI card also provides fou r. Any device th at conforms to the RS-232-C serial communication standard can be c onnected to th[...]

Overview Page 73 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation not consume a mo dule slot. The RS-232-C connections are bro ught out through special cables to the backplane I/O panel. The QPC841 Quad SDI card and the QPC513 Enhanced SDI card mount in standard backplane slots, and their se rial interface connectors are located on the card front p[...]

Page 74 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 — Data terminal equipmen t (DTE) emulat ion mode — Data communication equipm ent (DCE) emulation mode • enable/disable switch and LED • input/output (I/O) device add ress selectable by on-board switches. The QPC513 ESDI card provides these features: • fully synchronous serial [...]

Overview Page 75 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power consumption The SDI cards obtain their power directly from the module backplane. Power consumption for each of the cards is shown in Table 10. Environmental The SDI cards operate without degradation under the condi tions listed in Table 11. Electrostatic di scharge The SDI card[...]

Page 76 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Electromagneti c interference The CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 systems m eet the requirements of FCC Part 15 and CSA C108.8 electromagnetic inte rference (EMI) standards as a class “A” computing device. To accomplish this, the SDI cables must exit the module through EMI filter[...]

Overview Page 77 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The following maintenance pro gram is used to maintain individu al SDI synchronous ports. • LD 48 Link Diagnostic – For checkin g Automatic Call Distributio n (ACD) and Meridian Link ports. Instructions for runni ng the various maintenance pro grams are found in Software Input/Ou[...]

Page 78 of 906 Overview 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 79 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 88 Circuit card installation Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Card slots — Large System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Circuit card installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 80 of 906 Circuit card installation 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Circuit card installation Ta b l e 1 2 Large System card slots (P art 1 of 4) Component Large System A0786611 Call Processor P entium II ® card 81C Core/Net: “CP” A0810486 Call Processor P entium II 81C Core/Net: “CP” NT1P61 Fiber Superlo op Network card Core/N[...]

Circuit card installation Page 81 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT5K02 Analog Line card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT5K07 Universal T runk card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT5K17 Direct Dial Inward T runk card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT5K18 Central Office T r unk card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT5K19 E&M T runk[...]

Page 82 of 906 Circuit card installation 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT6D71 U Interface Line card IPE: any slot b ut “Contr” NT6D72 Basic Rate Signal Concentrator card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT6D73 Multi-pur pose ISDN Signaling Processor card Core/Net: 0–7 NT6D80 MSDL Core/Net: 0–7 NT7D16 Data Access card IPE: any slot but[...]

Circuit card installation Page 83 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NTCK43AA Primar y Rate Interface card Core/Net: 0-7 Net: 5-11, 13-14 NTRB33 FIber Junctor Interface card For 81C: Core/Net: 8 and 9, Net module: 2 and 3 NTRE39 Optical Cable Management card F or 81C: Net module: the slot t o the right side of 1 4, the slot to the lef[...]

Page 84 of 906 Circuit card installation 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Precautions To avoid personal i njury and equipm ent damage, review the following guidelines before handl ing system equipment . To avoid damage to circuit cards from static discharge, wear a properly connected antistatic wrist strap when you work on system equipment. I[...]

Circuit card installation Page 85 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • Keep cards installed in the system as much as possible to avoid dirty contacts and unnecessary wear. • Store cards in a cool, dry, dust-free area. During repair and maintenance procedures do the followin g: • Turn off the circuit breaker or switch for a modul[...]

Page 86 of 906 Circuit card installation 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • Hardware disable cards, whenever th ere is an enable/dis able switch, before they are removed or i nserted. • Return defective or heavily contaminated cards to a repair center. Do not try to repair or clean them. Installing a circuit card This procedure provides d[...]

Circuit card installation Page 87 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 7 Insert the card into the card aligning gu ides in the card cage. Gently push the card into the slot until you feel re sistance. The tip of the locking device must be behind the edge of the card cage (see Figure 1 6). 8 Lock the card into position by si multaneously[...]

Page 88 of 906 Circuit card installation 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 9 If there is an enable/disable switch, set it to Enb. Note: Do not enable the switch on an NT8D04 Superloop Network card or QPC414 Network card until network loop cables are installe d. 10 If you are adding a voice, conference, o r tone and digit l oop, press the manua[...]

Page 89 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 100 Acceptance tests Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Conference cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 90 of 906 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Conference cards Procedure 2 T esting conference car ds Use this procedure to test a conference ca rd or to test the confer ence function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Request the status of a lo op on the conference card: LD 38 STAT l[...]

Acceptance tests Page 91 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 4 Test the conference loop for c hann el, group, and switching faults: CNFC loop If the conference loop passe s the tests, the output is OK . If the system response is other than OK , see the Software Input/ Output: Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the messages. 5 Pre[...]

Page 92 of 906 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Again, see “LD 38 ” in the Software Input/Outp ut: Maintenance (553-3001-511) for detaile d information on using this command. 7 End the session in LD 38: **** End of Procedure Digitone receiver cards Procedure 3 T esting digitone r eceiver cards Use this procedure to test a[...]

Acceptance tests Page 93 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Line cards Procedure 4 T esting line cards Use this procedure to test a line card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Perform a network memory test, continuity test, and signali ng test on a specific loop and shelf: LD 30 SHLF l s loop and shelf numbers If the system re[...]

Page 94 of 906 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Multifrequency sender cards Procedure 5 T esting multifrequency sender cards Use this procedure to test a multif requency sender (MFS) ca rd or the MFS function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Test and enable an MFS loop: LD 46 MFS loop[...]

Acceptance tests Page 95 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Multifrequency signaling cards Procedure 6 T esting multifrequenc y signaling cards Use this procedure to test a multifrequency signaling card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Test and enable the sp ecified unit: LD 54 ATST l s c u loop, shelf, card, and unit numbers[...]

Page 96 of 906 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 3 End the session in LD 30: **** End of Procedure Trunk cards Use the following procedur es to test a trunk card. Procedure 8 T esting a trunk card using a maintenance telephone 1 Access the system from a maintenan ce telephone. See “Communicating with the Meridian 1” in the[...]

Acceptance tests Page 97 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation When you see the DN? prompt, enter th e director y number (DN) you wa nt the system to dial. If the system response is other than OK , see the Software Input/ Output: Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the messages. 4 End the session in LD 36: **** 5 Test an automati ca[...]

Page 98 of 906 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 For other than an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter: ENLL loop 4 Test the TDS loop: TDS loop If the system response is other than OK , see the Software Inpu t/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the messages. 5 End the session in LD 34: **** 6 Using a maintenance te[...]

Acceptance tests Page 99 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation RNG#loop## 764#loop## Provides r ing tone from TDS loop specified. **** Exits TDS test program. T abl e 13 TDS tone tests[...]

Page 100 of 906 Acceptance tests 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 101 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 156 Option settings Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Circuit card grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Gener[...]

Page 102 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 QPC471 Clock Controller card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Tr unk card . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 QPC550 Direct Inward Dia[...]

Option settings Page 103 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Throughout this d ocument, if neither ON nor OFF is given (t here is a blank space) for a position on a switch, that pos ition may be set to either ON or OFF because it has no function for the option described. Figure 17 Circuit card grid S4 (switch 4 at coordinate B11) S8 (s[...]

Page 104 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card Table 14 lists op tion settings for t he NT1R20 Off-Premise Stati on analog card. Ta b l e 1 4 OPS analog line card configuration (P ar t 1 of 3) Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) Class of Serv ice (CLS) (Note 1) ONP O[...]

Option settings Page 105 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Loop loss (dB) (Note 3) 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 > 2.5–3.0 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–4.5 >4.5–15 TIMP (Notes 1, 4) 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms T abl e 14 OPS analog line card configuration (P ar t 2 of 3) Application On-premise [...]

Page 106 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 BIMP (Notes 1, 4) 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2 3CO M2 Gain treatment (Note 5) No Ye s Ta b l e 1 4 OPS analog line card configuration (P ar t 3 of 3) Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) Class of Serv ice (CLS) (Note 1) ONP OPX Note 1: Conf[...]

Option settings Page 107 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT5D12AA Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card Switch setting tables for this card are li sted in subsection s according to their function. Bold font designates factory (defau l t) settings. General purpose switches Use switch set SW9 for Trunk 0; use switch set SW15 for Trunk 1 (see Table[...]

Page 108 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 A set of three switches provides select ion of dB val ues. Use SW5, SW6, and SW7 for Trunk 0; use SW11, SW12, and SW13 for Trunk 1 (see Table 17). A set of four DIP switches provides se lection among three values for receiver impedance. Use SW8 for Trunk 0; use SW14 for Trun k 1[...]

Option settings Page 109 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Ring ground switches A set of four DIP switches selects wh ich Ring lines are connected to ground (see Table 19). T abl e 19 Ring gr ound s witch set tings Switch Description S2 switch setting 1 T run k 0 T ransmit off - Ring lin e is not grounded on- Ring line is grounded 2 [...]

Page 110 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 DCH mode and address select switches One switch selects an on-board NTBK 51AA D-Channel dau ghterboard and an external MSDL/DCHI card. Fo ur other switches provide th e daughterboard address (see Table 20). T abl e 20 DCH mode and address select switch settings Switch Descriptio[...]

Option settings Page 111 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Illustrations of switch locatio ns and settings Figure 18 on page 112 displays functional areas for switches on the NT5D12AA DDP card. 9 on off off on 10 off on off on 11 on on off on 12 off off on on 13 on off on on 14 off on on on 15 on on on on Note 1: The maximum n umber [...]

Page 112 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 18 Switch functions and areas J5 J6 Port 0 Port 1 S3 S2 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 General Purpose Switches Receiver Impedence Line Build Out Switches Transmission Mode DCH Mode and Address Select DDP Faceplate 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 553-73[...]

Option settings Page 113 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 19 displays default settings for switches on the NT5D12AA DDP card. Figure 19 Switch default settings J5 J6 S2 S9 S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S10 S11 S12 S13 S1 4 S15 S3 o n o n o n o n 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 553-7309[...]

Page 114 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC Tables 22 through 27 li st option settings for the N T6D42 Ringing G enerator. Ta b l e 2 2 NT6D42 recommended options for North America n and British T ele com Application Ringing frequency Ringing vo l t a g e Jumper locati ons Ringing outpu t Nor t[...]

Option settings Page 115 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 25 NT6D42 SW1 Ringing frequenc y (Hz) Po s i t i o n S W 1 20 1 25 2 50 3 T abl e 26 NT6D42CB SW2 SW2 Ringing vol t ag e Message waiting vol t ag e 1234 86 V ac –120 V dc off off off off 86 V ac –150 V dc off off off on 80 V ac –120 V dc on off off off 80 V ac ?[...]

Page 116 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 2 7 NT6D42CC SW2 SW2 Ringing vol t ag e Message waiting vol t ag e 1234 86 V ac –100 V dc off off off off 86 V ac –150 V dc off off off on 80 V ac –100 V dc on off off off 80 V ac –150 V dc on off off on 75 V ac –100 V dc off on off off 75 V ac –150 V dc off[...]

Option settings Page 117 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane NT6D68 Core module backplane T abl e 28 NT5D2101/NT9D110 2 Core/Net work module backplane Jum p er Location (between slots) Core/Network 1 Core/Network 0 JB1 14/15 Jumper plug not installed Plug installed Note: Berg jumper is lo[...]

Page 118 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT6D80 Multi-purpose Se rial Data Link card Ta b l e 3 0 NT6D80 Multi-purpose Seri al Data Link card Po r t 0 — S W 4 Por t 0 — S W 8 RS-232-D DTE or DCE* RS-422-A DTE (ter minal) RS-422-A DCE (modem) all off all off all on all off all on all off Po r t 1 — S W 3 Por t 1 ?[...]

Option settings Page 119 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Tables 31 through 35 list opti on settings for the NT8D14 Universal Tr unk card. T abl e 31 NT8D14 vintage AA jumper strap se ttings Modes Locatio n Jum p er s t r a p Central Office (CO) J1, J2 off 2-wa y tie trunk (loop dial repeat) J1, J2 off 2-[...]

Page 120 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 3 2 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings—factory standard T runk type s Loop length Jumper strap settings J1.X J2.X J3.X J4 .X CO/FX/W A TS Zero–1524 m (5000 ft) Off Off 1–2 1–2 2-wa y tie (LDR) 2-wa y tie (O AID) DID Zero–600 ohms RAN: continuous opera[...]

Option settings Page 121 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 33 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings—extended range T runk type s Loop length Jumper strap settings J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X CO/FX/W A TS > 1524 m (5000 ft) Off Off 1–2 2–3 2-wa y tie (LDR) 2-wa y tie (O AID) DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2– 3 RAN: pul[...]

Page 122 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 2-wa y tie (O AID) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2 DID (loop < 600 ohms) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2 DID (loop Š 600 ohms) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms N/A 3COM2 RAN: continuous operation mode 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A P aging 600 ohms 600 ohms N/A N/[...]

Option settings Page 123 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 35 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB cable loop resistan ce and los s Cable length Cable loop resistance (ohms) Cable loop loss (dB) (non-loaded at 1kHz) 22 A WG 24 A WG 26 A WG 22 A WG 24 A WG 26 A WG 915 m (3000 ft) 97 155 251 0.9 1.2 1.5 1524 m (5000 ft) 162 260 41 7 1.6 2.0 2[...]

Page 124 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Ta b l e 3 6 NT8D15 E& M T runk ca rd Jum p e r (Note 1) Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk Ty p e I P aging Ty p e I T ype II DX tip & ring pair M—rcv M—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J1.X off off off off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.X o[...]

Option settings Page 125 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT8D17 Conference/TDS card Switch and jumper settings are used to select the companding law and to change the conference attenuation PAD le vels. These PAD levels are used if prompt CPAD = 1 in LD97. The J1 connec tor on the faceplate is reserved for future use. You can enabl[...]

Page 126 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC Frequency Amplitude Settings P1 P2 P3 20 Hz 86 V ac open open 2–5 8–11 25 Hz 70 V ac open 1–4 7–10 open 25 Hz 80 V ac open 3–6 9–12 open 25 Hz 86 V ac open 2–5 8–11 open 50 Hz 70 V ac 1–4 7–10 open open 50 Hz 80 V ac 3–6 9–12 o[...]

Option settings Page 127 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT8D22 System Monitor The master system monitor, located in the column wi th CP 0, must be numbered 0. Slave system monitors are numbered from 1 to 63. For examples of system monito r option settings in basic configuration s, see “Sample settings for NT 8D22 System Monitors[...]

Page 128 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configure the system monito r in Remote Peripheral Equipment (R PE) columns as slaves. There is no serial connection be tween RPE columns. Ta b l e 3 7 NT8D22 SW1 SW1 function Po s i t i o n 12345678 Not used Meridian 1 columns only on off P osition 1 is OFF (Meridian 1 columns [...]

Option settings Page 129 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 38 NT8D22 SW2 SW2 indication Po s i t i o n 12345678 Master system monitor Slav e system monitor on off Not used All other operation on off F or master , indi cates total number of slav es Configure 3–8 according to the T ab le 4 0 on page 130 . F or each slav e, in[...]

Page 130 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 4 0 NT8D22 settings fo r total numb er of sla ves—SW2 on master How man y slave units Switch positi on How man y slave units Switch positi on 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 on on on on on on 32 off on on on on on 1 on on on on on off 33 off on on on on off 2 on on on on of[...]

Option settings Page 131 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 41 NT8D22 slave address—SW2 on slave Slave unit address Po s i t i o n Slave unit addr ess Po s i t i o n 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 on on on on on off 33 off on on on on off 2 on on on on off on 34 off on on on off on 3 on on on on off off 35 off on on on off off 4 [...]

Page 132 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Baud rate Switches SW13, SW10, SW 11, and SW12 determine the baud rate for ports 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See th e configuration for these switches in Table 42. * For future use . Address Switch SW15 or SW16 and logic on the [...]

Option settings Page 133 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation configurations for both switches are show n in Table 43. To avoid system problems, switches SW15 and SW16 must not be con figured identically. * T o enable por ts 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. T o enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1 to ON. + F or each X, the setti[...]

Page 134 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NT8D72 Primary Rate Interface card The NT8D72 Primary Rate Interface card allows the co nfiguration of interface impedance by way of DIP switches. Ta b l e 4 4 QSDI paddle board DTE/DCE mode switch settings Mode P ort 1 — SW 3 Po r t 1 — S W 2 123456123456 DTE (terminal) on [...]

Option settings Page 135 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 20 NT8D72 DIP sw itch settings S1 S2 11 22 or 75 ohm switch setting 120 ohm switch setting (default) NT8D72AA, NT8D72AB NT8D72BA S1 S2 OFF ON OFF ON S1 S2 11 22 or 75 ohm switch setting 120 ohm switch setting (default) S1 S2 OFF ON OFF ON 553-7463[...]

Page 136 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card QPC71 E&M/DX Signaling and Paging Trunk cards Options (minimum vinta ge N) Plug location NT5D21 Core/Network module NT8D35 Network module F13 Application Unit 0 E35 switch Unit 1 E5 switch 123456781234567 8 E&M off off off on off off on of[...]

Option settings Page 137 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC414 Network card Application Pin connection J3/S2 and J4/S1 T -1 f acilities (including PRI/DTI),* channel ser vice unit connect pins 1 and 2 (pin 1 is next to the white dot) Note 1: P ossible jumper locations for vintage B (for diff erent styles/ser ies): J3—E11 or H11 [...]

Page 138 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QPC441 3-Port Extender cards For CS 1000M SG and Multi Grou p systems, QPC441 vintage F or later must be used in all modules. Ta b l e 4 5 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT4N41CP PII Core/Net modules Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to “A”. Switch Settings Module D2[...]

Option settings Page 139 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 46 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT5D21 modules Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to “A”. Switch Settings Module D20 s witch po sition 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NT5D21 (Op tion 61C) Core/Network 0 of f on on off on on on on Core/Network 1 of f on on off on on on of[...]

Page 140 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 4 7 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT8D35 module Jumper Settings: Set J umper RN27 at E35 to “A”. Switch Settings Modules D20 s witch po sition 1 2 3 4 Option 81, 81C (Note 1) off on on on Shelf Group 5 6 7 8 0 on on on on 1 on on off on 0 2 on off on on 3 on off [...]

Option settings Page 141 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling Trunk cards Table 48 and Table 49 on page 142 list option setti ngs for loop signaling trunk cards. T abl e 48 QPC559, QPC560 sing le density Application Single den sity—Unit 0/1 F30/F8 switch 123456 Outgoing ANI only: loop pulsing off off off [...]

Page 142 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 4 9 QPC559, QPC560 double de nsity Application Double density— Unit 0/1/2/3 H17/H3/A17/A3 switch 123456 Outgoing ANI only: loop pulsing off off off off off off batter y and ground p ulsing off off off off on off Other than outgoing ANI on off on off on off Jumpers (QP[...]

Option settings Page 143 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards Table 50 lists switch and jumper settings for options availabl e. T abl e 50 QPC528 T runk cards switch and jumper settings Switch Settings Switch position: Switch S1 (location A23) 12345678 on off on off on off on off Switch position: Unit 0, Sw[...]

Page 144 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QPC471 Clock Controller card Table 51 lists option settings for the QPC471 Clock Controller card. Ta b l e 5 1 QPC471 vintage H System SW1 SW2 SW4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 61C on on on on off off off off off on * * 81 off off off off off off off off off on * * 81C on off off off [...]

Option settings Page 145 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Trunk card Note 1: There is no ground start signalling for QPC777 CO trunk cards. Always select loop start signalling for Q PC777 CO trunk cards. Note 2: On QPC777 CO trun k cards, the pads are in for short line lengths and the pads are out f[...]

Page 146 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QPC550 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card Tables 52 through 56 give the op tion settings for the QPC550 DID Trunk card. Ta b l e 5 2 QPC550 vintages A and B—real/com plex balance impedance selection Device location Device designation Switch numb er Unit numb er Impedance type Real [...]

Option settings Page 147 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 54 QPC550 vintage A—software/hard ware control for 2dB pad Device location Device designation Unit numb er Switch numb er S/W 2 dB pad contr ol H/W (pad in) (pad out) F38 S1 0 1 off off on 2 on off off 1 3 on off off 4 off off on F1 S2 0 1 off off on 2 on off off 1 [...]

Page 148 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 5 6 QPC550 vintage B—software control for 2dB pad Device location Device designation Unit numb er Switch numb er 2 dB pad cont rol H/W (pad in) (pad out) F38 S1.0/1 1 1 on of f 2 off off 0 3 of f off 4 on off F1 S1.2/3 3 1 on of f 2 off off 2 3 of f off 4 on off[...]

Option settings Page 149 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC551 Radio Paging Trunk card Signal duration on the 18-pair faceplate S1 (F33) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Binar y value (.1 second) 1 2 4 8 16 32 Note: This switch determines the length of time a signal stays on the 18-pa ir data bus. The time is set in binary to the nearest tenth second.[...]

Page 150 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QPC595 Digitone Receiver cards QPC577, QPC596 Digitone Receiver daughterboards QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card Location Connection 12 DTMF tones E9 Center to E3 16 DTMF tones E9 Center to E2 16/12 tone options jumper Jum per at P1 16 tone (4 x 4) connect pins 1 and 2 12 tone [...]

Option settings Page 151 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 1, 3, 7 on 136–225 m (451–750 ft) 101–200 m (356–655 ft) Switch 3 option for DTI with ESF SW3-1 on = e xtended superframe forma t (ESF) off = superframe f ormat (SF) T abl e 57 QPC720 Primary Rate Interface ca rd (P a rt 2 of 2) Switch S2 setting s T o repeater facili[...]

Page 152 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QPC775 Clock Controller card Tables 58 and 59 give option settings for the QPC775 Clock Con troller card. Ta b l e 5 8 QPC775 (before vinta ge E) switch settings System SW2 SW3 SW4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 CS 1000M MG off off off off off off off off on on on on CS 1000M SG on on [...]

Option settings Page 153 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card Tables 60 through 62 list option settin gs for the QPC841 4-Port SDI card. T abl e 60 QPC841 port 1 and 2 address selection Device number SW14 Po r t 1 Po r t 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 off off off off off on on on 2 3 off off off off off o[...]

Page 154 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Device number SW15 Po r t 3 Po r t 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 off off off off off on on on 2 3 off off off off off on on off 4 5 off off off off off on off on 6 7 off off off off off on off off 8 9 off off off off off off on on 10 11 off off off off off off on off 12 13 off off off o[...]

Option settings Page 155 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 62 QPC841 DTE or DCE selection Mode Po r t 1 — S W 8 Po r t 1 — S W 9 123456123456 DTE (ter minal) on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE (modem) NT1P61 (Fiber) off on off off off off off on off off off off on on on off on off on off on on on on Po r t 2 ?[...]

Page 156 of 906 Option settings 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 157 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 182 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 158 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 used whenever the phone lines have t o leave the bui lding in which t he switch is installed. The NT1R20 OPS analog line card provides: • line supervision • hookflash • battery reversal Each unit is independentl y configured by software control [...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 159 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 21 OPS analog line card – faceplate S OPS Anlg LC NT1R20 Rlse 0x Card lock latch Card lock latch This symbol indicates that field-selectable jumper strap settings are located on this card LED 553-6190[...]

Page 160 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description This functional description of the NT 1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) analog line card is divided int o two parts. Firs t, a descri ption of the card’s control, signaling, and p ower interfaces is given , followed by a descript[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 161 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card interfaces Voice and signaling interfaces The eight line interfaces provide d by the NT1R20 OPS analog line card connect to conventional, 2-wire (ti p an d ring), analog line facilit ies. Incoming analog voice and signaling in formation from a[...]

Page 162 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Line interface units The NT1R20 OPS analog line card contains eight independen tly configurable interface units. Relays are pr ovided in each unit to apply ringing onto the line. Signal detection circuits mo nitor on-hook/off-hook sign aling. Two code[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 163 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation — firmware version — self-test status — programmed configuration statu s • receipt and implementatio n of card configuration: — programming of the codecs — enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card — programming of input/o[...]

Page 164 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 See Software Input/Output: Admi nistration (553-3001-311 ) for LD 10 service change instructions. Ta b l e 6 3 OPS analog line card configuration Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) Class of ser vice ONS OPS Loop resistance [...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 165 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Port-to-port lo ss configuration The loss plan for the NT1R20 OPS anal og line card determines port- to-port loss for connections between an OPS anal og line card unit (po rt) and other ports. The transmission properties of each lin e unit are char[...]

Page 166 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Analog line interface Table 64 lists the electrical characteris tics of NT1R20 OPS analog line card line interface units. T abl e 64 OPS analog line card – el ectrical characteristics Characteristic Specification T er minal impedance (TIMP) 60 0 or [...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 167 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements Table 65 shows the maximum power cons umed by the card from each system power supply. Foreign and surge voltage protection The NT1R20 OPS analog line card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage (power cross) specifications and FCC P[...]

Page 168 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Environmental specifications Table 67 shows the environmental speci fications of the OPS analog line card. Operation The applications, featur es, and signaling arrangem ents for each unit on the NT1R20 OPS analog line card are assi gned through LD 10 [...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 169 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Incoming calls Incoming calls to a telephone connected to the NT1R20 OPS analog lin e card originate from stations that can be local (serve d by the PBX) or remote (served through the public switched telephone network). The alerti ng signal to tele[...]

Page 170 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Outgoing calls For outgoing calls from a telephone, a line unit is seized when the telephone goes off-hook, placing a low-resistance l oop across the tip and ring leads towards the NT1R20 OPS analo g line card (see Table 69 o n page 170 ). When the ca[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 171 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Outpulsing Addr essing signals Near-end station dials number (loop pulsing or DTMF tones). The system detects star t of dialing and remov e dial tone . Ringback (or busy) The system decodes addressing, route calls, and supply r ingback tone to near[...]

Page 172 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Connector pin assignments The OPS analog line card brings the eight analog telephone lines to the IPE backplane through a 160-pi n connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the module, which is then conne[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 173 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 23 OPS analog line card – typica l cross co nnection e xample 553-AAA1117 NT8D37 IPE Module Slot 0 NT1R20 Off-premise Station Line Card Unit 0 Unit 7 0T 0R 26 1 27 2 System Cross-connect OPS or ONS telephone connections A MDF Unit 1 Unit 2[...]

Page 174 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuring the OPS analog line card The line type, termin ating impedance, and balance network confi guration for each unit on the card is selected by soft ware service change entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card. J[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 175 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Before the appropriate balance networ k can be selected, the loop length between the near-end and the far-end station must be known. To assist in determining loop l ength, “Port-to-port l oss” on p age 180 describes some typical resistance and [...]

Page 176 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 24 OPS analog line card – jumper block locations 553-6191 J4.0 J4. 1 J6. 0 J6. 1 J7 .0 J7 . 1 J 0.0 J0. 1 J2. 0 J2. 1 J 3.0 J3. 1 J1 .0 J1 . 1 J5. 0 J5. 1[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 177 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation local office, or through a distant office. The line is not switched at these offices; however, depending on the facil ities used, the local office serving the OPS station can pro vide line functions such as battery and ringing. Facilities are gener[...]

Page 178 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 25 Traditional OPS application configuratio n 553-AAA1118 System Public Network Non-switched thru connections OPS analog line card port CO trunk card port OPS termination Local CO Distant CO 0–3.5 dB 4.5 dB maximum 7.0 dB total maximum OPS li[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 179 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Other applications The operating range and built-in protection pro visions of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card make it suitable for applications which are variants on the traditional configuration shown in Fi gure 25 o n page 178 . Examples of such [...]

Page 180 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Port-to-port lo ss Loss is inserted between OPS analog line card po rts and other por ts in accordance with the loss plan. This plan determines the port-to-port loss for each call. When a port is configured for CLS OPS, loss is program med into the OP[...]

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 181 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The overall range ach ievable on an O PS line facility is limited by the signaling range (2300 ohms loop includin g telephone resistance). The signaling range is unaffected by gain treatment; thus, gain treatment can be used to extend the voice ran[...]

Page 182 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 OPS line terminations with lou dness characteristics designed for oth er applications can also impact transm ission performan ce. For example, wireless portables loudness characteristic s are selected for connections to switching systems for wireless [...]

Page 183 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 192 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 184 of 906 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The CP PIV front panel is equipped with an EMC gasket and two ejector/ injector handles. A reset button and two double LED packages (four LEDs in total) are placed at the front panel as well. The front panel features the following: • stacked dual standard DB9 Seria[...]

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Page 185 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 26 CP PIV card (front) Lan 1 Lan 2 COM 1 COM 2[...]

Page 186 of 906 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 27 CP PIV card (side) Functional description The card employs an Intel P entium Pro cessor as the central processing unit. The internal core clock frequency reaches from 600MHz to1.1GHz. The processor is manufactured i n 0.09 um process technol ogy and provide[...]

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Page 187 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation double pumped address bus (addresses running at 2*100 MHz = 200 MHz) is 32 bit wide supporting an address range of up to 4 GBy tes. The processor voltage specification is compliant with IMVP IV specification. Memory CP PIV memory uses DDR SDRAM t echnology. The CP[...]

Page 188 of 906 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 4 DTR 5 GND 6 DSR 7 RT S 8 CTS 9 RI T abl e 72 COM1 and COM2 pin assignments[...]

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Page 189 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation USB port The physical interface for the USB port to the front panel is through a standard USB connector. The corresponding Pin detai ls are shown in Table 73. 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports The physical interface for the two 10/100/1000 Mb ps Ethernet ports to th[...]

Page 190 of 906 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Front panel LED indicators The CP PIV card has a total of five LEDS on the front panel which are 15 KV ESD protected and can be controlled via CPLD. Table 75 explain s the function of each LED. Author’s note: Are there 5 or 4? Ta b l e 7 5 Front panel LED func tion[...]

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Page 191 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation ITP connector (25 PIN, Debug Only) Post 80 Debug LEDs (Optional) CP PIV has post 80 de bug LEDs to assist in debugging the board an d solving boot related problems . Using a GPCS fr om Super I/O X-bus, data lines are latched using latch 74F374. These help iden tif[...]

Page 192 of 906 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 193 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 248 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 194 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 mail systems, channel banks containing FXS cards, and key systems such as the Nortel Norstar. The lineside T1 card differs from trunk T1 cards in that it supports terminal equipment features such as hookflash, transfer, hold, and conference. This ca[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 195 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 29 Lineside T1 card faceplate YEL ALM RED ALM MAINT S LTI Rlse 0x NT5D11 Card lock latch Card lock latch Warning LEDs This symbol indicates that field-selectable switch settings are located on this card Card status LED 553-6478[...]

Page 196 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 In general, the LEDs operate as shown in Table 76. The STATUS LED indicates that the lineside T1 card has successfully passed its self test, and is functional. When the car d is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-tes[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 197 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: Note: The STATUS LED indicates th e enabled/disabled status of both card slots of the lineside T1 card simultaneously. To properly enable the card, both the motherboard and the daughterboard slots must be enabled . The STATUS LE D will turn[...]

Page 198 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 “Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software” on page 22 5 for information on T1 link maintenance. If the card detects that tests are bein g run or that alarms have been disabled through the MMI, this LED will light and will remain lit until t[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 199 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The lineside T1 card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective all-digital connection bet w een T1 compatible termin al equipment (such as voice mail systems, voice respo nse units, and trading turrets) and the system. The terminal equip[...]

Page 200 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Card interfaces The lineside T1 card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops through the DS-30X Interfaces circuits and maintenance data over the card LAN link. T1 interface circuit The lineside T1 card contains one T1 li ne interface circ[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 201 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Microcontrollers The lineside T1 card contains a microcont roll er that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller cont rols the followi ng: • reporting to the CPU via th[...]

Page 202 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Man-Machin e Interface The lineside T1 card provides an opti onal Man-Machine Interface (MMI) that is primarily used for T1 link performance monitoring and problem diagnosis. The MMI provides alarm notification, T1 link performance reporting and fau[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 203 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements The lineside T1 card requires +15 V, – 15 V, and +5 V from the backplane. One NT8D06 IPE Power Supply AC or NT6D 40 IPE Power Supply DC can supply power to a maximum of eight lineside T1 cards. See Table 78. Foreign and surge[...]

Page 204 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Environmental specifications Table 79 lists th e environmental speci fications of the lineside T1 card. Installation and configuration Installation and configuratio n of the lineside T1 card consists of six basic steps: 1 Configure the dip switches [...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 205 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Dip switch settings Begin the installation and configurat ion of the lineside T1 card by selecting the proper dip switch set tings for the environment. The lineside T1 card contains two dip switches, each containi ng eight switch pos itions. They[...]

Page 206 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 LD 97 for type: XPE. However, this is not mandatory, and, since the dip switch is li mited to 16, this will n ot always be possib le. Figure 31 Lineside T1 card – T1 protocol dip switch locations 553-6479 S1 S2 dip s witches[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 207 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T1 framing The lineside T1 card is capable of in terfacing with CPE or CSU equipment either in D4 or ESF framing mode. Make the selection for this dip sw itch position based on what type of frami ng the CPE or CSU equipment supports. T1 coding Th[...]

Page 208 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 cabled directly into the MMI terminal or mode m; select the slave setting if this card is cabled to another lineside T1 card in a daisy chain. Tables 80 through 83 describes the proper dip switch settings for each type of T1 link. After the card has[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 209 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 05 Off On Off On 06 Off On On Off 07 Off On On On 08 On Off Off Off 09 On Off Off On 10 On Off On Off 11 On Off On On 12 On On Off Off 13 On On Off On 14 On On On Off 15 On On On On T abl e 82 Lineside T1 card – T1 Switch 2 (S 2) dip switc h se[...]

Page 210 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Installation This section describes how to inst all and test the lineside T1 card. When installed, the line side T1 card occupies two card slots. It can be installed into an NT8D37 IPE modu le. When installing the lineside T1 card into NT8D 37 IPE m[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 211 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Certain vintage levels have dedicated 25-pair I/O connect ors only for card slots 0, 4, 8, and 12. These vintage levels are cabled with only 16 pairs of wires from each card slot to the I/O panel. Some of the 25-pair I/O connectors are split betw[...]

Page 212 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Vintage levels cabl ing 16 ports For modules with vintage levels that cabled 16 ports to the I/O panel, the lineside T1 card can be installed in to the following card slot pairs: The lineside T1 card cannot be installed into the following card slot [...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 213 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Cabling the lineside T1 card After configuring the dip sw itches and installing the lineside T1 card into the selected card slots, the li neside T1 card is ready to be cabled to the CPE or CSU equipment. Connections can also be made to the MMI te[...]

Page 214 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 32 Lineside T1 card – connection us ing the NT5D13AA lineside T1 cable 553-AAA1119 NT8D37 IPE Module Slot 0 Module I/O panel 1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29 5 30 6 31 7 32 8 33 9 34 16 41 17 42 24 49 System A (bl-w) (w-bl) (o-w) (w-o) (g-w) (w-g) (br-w[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 215 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Proc edure 11 Connecting to the MDF To make the connections at t he MDF, follow this proced ure: 1 Punch down the first eight pa irs of a standard telco 25-pair female-connectorized cross-connect ta il starting with the first tip and ring pair of[...]

Page 216 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 13A 2 T1 Tip, T ransmit Data 13B 27 T1 Ring, T ransmit Data 14A 3 Alarm out, Nor mally open 14B 28 Alarm out, Common 15A 4 Alarm out, Nor mally closed 15B 29 No Connection 16A 5 No Connection 16B 30 A wa y from MMI terminal, Receive Data 17A 6 Awa y[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 217 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 86 shows the pin assignments when using the NT5D1 3AA lineside T1 I/O cable. T abl e 86 Lineside T1 card – NT5D13AA connector pinouts (P art 1 of 2) I/O panel connector pin Lead designations NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O connector pin Lineside[...]

Page 218 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 T1 connectio ns T1 signaling for all 24 channels is transmitted over P2 conn ector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11 as shown in Table 86 on page 217 . Plug the DB15 male connector labeled “P2” into the T1 link. T1 tran smit and receive pairs must be turned [...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 219 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation One of the ways it can report information is through this external alarm connection. If connected, th e lineside T1 card’s microproces sor activates the external alarm hardware if it detects certain T1 link problems that it has classified as al[...]

Page 220 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Proc edure 12 Connecting two or more lineside T1 cards to the MMI termi nal Follow this procedure for connecting two or more lineside T1 card s to the MMI terminal: 1 Cable the DB9 male connecto r labeled “P5” (towards MMI terminal) to one of th[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 221 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 33 Lineside T1 card – connecting two or mo re ca rds to the MMI 553-6481 No connection LTI card no. 1 LTI card no. 2 LTI card no. 3 Last LTI card in daisy chain MMI terminal IPE module backplane I/O panel on rear of IPE module NT5D13 Mai[...]

Page 222 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Terminal configuration For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the line side T1 card, the interface characteristics must be configured to the following: • Speed – 1200 or 2400 bps, de pending on the setting of switch positi on 1 of Swi[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 223 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation cross-referenced to the correspondin g card unit number. Th is mapping is shown in Table 87. T abl e 87 DX-30 to T1 time slot map ping (P art 1 of 2) Item TN T1 Channel Number Motherboa rd 0 1 Motherboa rd 1 2 Motherboa rd 2 3 Motherboa rd 3 4 Mo[...]

Page 224 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Disconnect superv ision The lineside T1 card supports far-end disconnect supervisio n by opening the tip side toward the terminal equi pment upon the system's detecting a disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call. The Supervised[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 225 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software Description The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) suppl ies a maintenance interface to a terminal that prov ides T1 link di agno stics and historical in formation. See “Installation and configuration” o[...]

Page 226 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Two levels of alarm severity exist for bit errors and frame slip errors. For these conditions, two different thres hold and duratio n configurations are established. When the first level of severity is r eached (alarm level 1), the MMI will do the f[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 227 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • bursty seconds • unavailabl e seconds • framer slip seconds • loss of frame seconds It retains the T1 performance statistics for the current hour, and for each hour for the previous 24 hours. Descripti ons of each of these performance e[...]

Page 228 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 A space is inserted between the login co mmand (L), the shelf address, and the card slot address. The MMI then prompts for a pa ssword. The passwo rd is “ LTILINK ”, and it must be typed all in capital letters. After logging in, the prompt wil l[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 229 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation If ?<CR> is typed, the MMI will list th e above commands along with an explanation of their usage A screen similar to the following will appear. The help screen can also appear by typing H<CR > , or HELP<CR> . Each of these comm[...]

Page 230 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 C E Clear Error Clears the error coun ter f or the T1. D A [P] Display Alarms [Pause] Displays the alar m log – a l ist of the mo st recent 100 alar ms along with time and date stamps. D C Display Configuration Displays the configuration settings [...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 231 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Q Quit Logs the ter minal user out. If multiple lineside T1 cards share a single ter minal, logout after using the MMI. Because of the shared daisy-chained link, if a lineside T1 card is logged in, it occupies the bus and no other lineside T1 car[...]

Page 232 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuring parameters The MMI has been designed with defaul t settings so that no configuratio n is necessary. However, it can be configured to suit a specific environment. Set Time Before configuring the MMI, log in to th e system and enter the cu[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 233 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation When the Set Alarm command is used, a prom pt appears to configure the threshold level and du ration period for alarm lev els 1 and 2. The threshold value indicates the number of bit errors detected per second that is necessary to acti vate the a[...]

Page 234 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Clearing ” option has been set. Otherw ise, the alarm will continue unti l the command set Clear Alarm (C A) has been entered. When an alarm is cleared, the followin g activity caused by the alarm will be cleared: • the external alarm hardware w[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 235 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation When entering the Set Alarm command set, the MMI will scroll throug h the previously described series of alar m options. These opti ons are displayed along with their current value. Enter a new value or press Enter to retain the current value. Ta[...]

Page 236 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The “Disable Self-Clearing ” option cause s the system to continue the alarm condition until the Clear Alarm (C A) command set is entered. Line processing and the yellow alarm indicatio n to the CPE is terminated as soon as the alarm condition c[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 237 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Descriptions of the excessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions can be found in “Configuring parameters” on page 232 . Bi t errors may activate either a level 1 or level 2 alarm. The remaini ng conditions, when detected, will al[...]

Page 238 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 mode, yellow alarms can be sent and the lineside T1 card can enter line processing mode. Clear Alarm The Clear Alarm (C A) command set wi ll clear all activity initiated by an alarm: the external alarm hardware will be deactivated (the contact norma[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 239 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation of the lineside T1 card. Entering t he Display Status (D S) command set will cause a screen similar to the followin g to appear: Performance counters and reporting The MMI monitors the performance of the T1 link acco rding to several performance [...]

Page 240 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • Loss of frame seconds – loss of frame or loss of signal for three consecutive seconds. • Framer slip seconds – one ore more frame s lips in a second. The MMI also maintains an overall error counter th at is a sum of all the errors counted [...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 241 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Display History Enter the Display History (D H) command set to display performance counters for each hour for the past 24 hours. A screen similar to the following will appear: Use the pause command to display a fu ll screen at a time by entering [...]

Page 242 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Tests can be performed once (for 1 th roug h 98 minutes), or continuously (selected by entering 99 minutes) until a “Stop Test” command is entered. Tests continue f or the duration specif ied even if a failure occurs, and terminate at the end of[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 243 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Test 2, external loopback, assumes an external loopback is applied to the T1 link. Test data is generated and received by the lineside T1 card on all timeslots. If t est 1 passes but test 2 fa ils, it indicates that the T1 link is defective betwe[...]

Page 244 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 in tandem. Figure 36 demonstrates how the signaling is looped back toward the CPE equipment. Applications The lineside T1 interface is an IPE line card that provides cost-effective connection between T1-compatib le IP E and a system or off-premise e[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 245 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation For example, the lineside T1 card can be used to conne ct the system to a T1-compatible VRU. An example of this t ype of equipmen t is Nortel Open IVR system. In this way, the system can send a call to the VRU. Because the lineside T1 card suppor[...]

Page 246 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 38 Lineside T1 inte rface in off-premi se application 553-AAA1124 T1 T1 Channel bank LTI System Public network[...]

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 247 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Similarly, the lineside T1 can be used to provide a connection between the system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 39. In this case, channel banks would not be required if the No rstar system is equipped with a T1 interface. Note: The line[...]

Page 248 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 249 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 312 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 250 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 in the Analog (500 /2500-type) Telephone Administ ration program LD 10. The LEI also comes equippe d with a Man-Machine Interface (MMI) maintenance program, which provi des diagnostic information regarding the status of the E1 link. • NT5D33AC/NT5[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 251 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation motherboard (31.75 by 25.40 cm (12.5 by 10 in) and a daught erboard (5.08 by 15.24 cm (2 by 6 in). Card connections The LEI uses the NT8D81AA Tip and Ri ng cable to connect from the IPE backplane to the 25-pair Amphenol co nnector on th e IPE In[...]

Page 252 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 40 NT5D33AB LEI card – fac eplate[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 253 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 41 NT5D34AB LEI card – fac eplate[...]

Page 254 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The LEDs give status indication s on the operations as described in Table 92. The STATUS LED indicates if the LEI has successfully passed its s elf test, and therefore, if it is f unctional. When the card is inst alled, this LED remains lit for two [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 255 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation condition. Depending on how the Man Machine Int erface (MMI) is configured, this LED will remain lit until one the fo llowing actions occur: • If the “Self-Clearing” function is en abled in the MMI, the LED will clear the alarm when the al[...]

Page 256 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 42 LEI card – block diagram[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 257 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Overview The LEI card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective, all-digital connection between E1 compatible termin al equi pment (such as voice mail systems, voice response units, trading turr ets, etc.) and the system. In this applic[...]

Page 258 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 E1 interface circuit The LEI contains one E1 line-interface circuit which provide s 30 individually configurable voice interfaces to one E1 link in 30 differ ent time slots. The circuit demultiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS-30X transmit signaling bi tstrea[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 259 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation — card identification (card type , vintage, serial number) — firmware version — self-test results — programmed unit parameter status • receipt and implementatio n of card configuration — control of the E1 line interface — enabling/[...]

Page 260 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 provides alarm notification, E1 link perform ance reporting, and faul t isolation testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the I/O panel to a terminal or modem. Multiple card s (up to 64) can be served through one MMI terminal or [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 261 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 2 Redirecting Line ID Presentation (RLIP) When an incoming call over th e TDM/ IP network or a CS 1 000 originated call which has undergone redirecti ons is directed towards the CAS+ compliant sy stem, Redirecting Li ne ID can be provided over t[...]

Page 262 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Power requirements Table 94 shows the volt age and maximu m current that the LEI requires from the backplane. One NT8D06 IPE Power Su pply AC or NT6D40 IPE Supply DC can supply power to a maximum of eight LEIs. Foreign and surge voltage protections [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 263 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Installation and Configuration Installation and configuratio n of the LEI consists of six basic steps: 1 Configure the dip switches on th e LEI for the call environment. 2 Install the LEI into the selected card slots. 3 Cable from the I/O panel [...]

Page 264 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 of the motherboard circuit card as sho wn in Figure 44 on page 266 . The settings for these switches are shown in Table 96 on page 267 through Table 99 on page 270 . When the LEI card is oriented as shown in Figure 44 on page 266 , the dip switches [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 265 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation E1 Coding The LEI is capable of interfacing with LTU equipment usi ng either AMI or HDB3 coding. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on the type of coding the LTU equipment supports.[...]

Page 266 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 44 LEI card – E1 protocol dip switch locations U7 8 U7 7 C4 6 U6 4 U6 6 U7 9 U6 3 U6 5 U6 2 RP1 6 C4 1 C3 6 U6 1 C3 5 U6 0 U4 8 U4 9 U4 7 U2 5 U2 6 U2 9 R2 5 R2 6 C2 5 C3 4 R2 0 R1 9 C3 7 C7 1 RP8 RP7 C4 2 C6 9 C6 7 C6 8 U3 1 U3 0 U2 8 U2 7[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 267 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Line supervision on E1 failure This setting determines in what state all 30 LEI ports will appear to the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 in case of E1 failure. Ports can appear as either in the “on-hook” o r “off-hook” states on E1 fa[...]

Page 268 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 When dip switch #1, positions 2 and 8 are set to “Table,” AB Bits are configured by the user through the Set Mode MMI command (see “Set Mode” on page 295 ). Otherwise, the signaling scheme selected by dip switch 1, positions 2 and 8 will be [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 269 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 98 LEI card – XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3-6) XPEC Address S1 Switch Po s i t i o n 3 S1 Switch Po s i t i o n 4 S1 Switch Po s i t i o n 5 S1 Switch Po s i t i o n 6 00 OFF OFF OFF OFF 01 ON OFF OF F OFF 02[...]

Page 270 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 When setting E1 Switch 2 dip switch se ttings, there are di fferences between vintages. For NT5D33AB or NT5D34AB cards, use Table 99. For NT5D33AC or NT5D34AC cards, use Table 99 on page 270 . Ta b l e 9 9 LEI card – E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch se[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 271 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation After the card has been i nstalled, display the d ip switch settings usi ng the MMI command Display Configuration (D C) . See “Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software” on page 284 for details on this and the rest of the available MMI c[...]

Page 272 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 of module or cabinet. In all other modules or cabinets where the conditions listed below do not exist, the LEI will work in any two adjacent card slots: • In the NTAK12 Small Remote IPE Expans ion Cabinet only card slots 10-15 are available. • I[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 273 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Vintage levels cabl ing 30 ports: For modules with vin tage levels that cabled 30 ports to the I /O panel, the LEI can be installed in any pair of card slots 0-15. Vintage levels cabl ing 16 ports: For modules with vint age levels that cable 16 [...]

Page 274 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Alternatively, all LEI conn ections can be made at the main distribution frame instead of conn ecting the NT5D35 AA or NT5D36A A LEI card extern al I/O cable at the I/O panel. This elimin ates these card slot restrictions. Cabling the LEI card After[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 275 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation This cable consists of a 25-pair amph enol connector (P1) on one end which plugs into the I/O panel. The other end has 4 conn ectors: 1 a DB15 female connector (P2) with an adapter that breaks out Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive ) connectors, whic[...]

Page 276 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Table 103 shows the pin assignments from the I/O panel relatin g to the pin assignments of the lineside E1 I/O cable. 17A 6 A way from MMI terminal, transmit data 17B 31 T ow ard MMI terminal, transmit data 18A 7 T ow ard MMI termin al, receive data[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 277 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation E1 Connections For twisted-pair install ations, E1 signaling f or all 30 channels is transmitted over P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11, as shown in Table 103 on page 276 . Plug the DB 15 male connector la beled “P2” into th e E1 link. E1 tr[...]

Page 278 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 CPE at the far-end will likewise have transmit and r eceive wired straight from the RJ48 demarc at the far- end of the carri er facility. For 75 ohm coaxial installati ons, E1 signaling for all 30 channels is transmitted over P2 connecto r pins 1, 3[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 279 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 128 LEIs can be linked, locat ed in up to 16 se parate IPE shel ves, to one MMI terminal using the daisy chain approach. If only one LEI is will be inst alled, cable from the DB9 male connector labeled “P5” (toward MMI terminal) to one of th[...]

Page 280 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 45 LEI card – connecti ng two or more cards to the MMI Terminal configuration For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the LEI, the interface characteristics must be set to: • speed – 1200 or 2400 bps • character width – 7 [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 281 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • stop bits – one • software handshak e (XON/XOFF ) – off Software Configuration Although much of the arch itecture and many features of the LEI card are different from the analog line card, th e LEI has been designed to emulate an analo[...]

Page 282 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Motherboa rd 7 8 Motherboa rd 8 9 Motherboard 9 10 Motherboard 10 11 Motherboa rd 11 12 Motherboa rd 12 13 Motherboa rd 13 14 Motherboa rd 14 15 Motherboa rd 15 17 Daughterb oard 0 18 Daughterb oard 1 19 Daughterb oard 2 20 Daughterb oard 3 21 Daugh[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 283 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Disconnect superv ision The LEI supports far-end disconnect supervision by opening the tip side toward the terminal equipment upon th e system’s detecting a disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call. The Supervised Analog Line [...]

Page 284 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software Description The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) pr ovides E1-link diagnostics and historical information fo r the LEI system. See “Installation and Configuration” on page 263 for instruction s on how to [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 285 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Two levels of alarm severity exist fo r bit errors. Different threshold and duration settings must be established for each level. When the first level of severity is r eached (alarm level 1), the MMI causes the following: • the external alarm [...]

Page 286 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • framer-slip seconds • loss-of-frame seconds The MMI retains E1 performance statis tics for the current hour, and for each hour for the previous 24. For descripti ons of these performance error counters and instructions on how to create a repor[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 287 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation LEI::ss cc> (for multi-card inst allations, where ss re presents the shelf address and cc represents the card slot address.) Basic commands MMI commands can now be executed. The seven basic commands are: •H e l p •A l a r m • Clear •D[...]

Page 288 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Each of these commands can be execute d by entering the first lett er of the command or by entering the entire comman d. Commands with more than one word are entered by entering the first le tter of the first word, a space, and the first letter of t[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 289 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation D S(P) Display Status . Displa ys carrier status, including alar m state and, if active , alar m lev el. (Momentarily stop the scrolling disp lay by typing P . Continue scrolling by typing any other k ey .) H or ? Help . Disp lays the Help scree[...]

Page 290 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuring parameters The MMI has been designed with defaul t settings so that no configuratio n is necessary. However, it can be configured based on the call environment. Set Time Before beginning to configure th e MMI, login to the syst em and ve[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 291 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation — an alarm message is created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal — the LEI card enters line-conditioni ng mode — a yellow alarm message is sent to the CPE/LTU Line processing sends the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 either all “on[...]

Page 292 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The duration value is set in seconds and can be set from 1 to 3,600 seconds (1 hour). This duration value indicates ho w long the alarm condition must last before an alarm will be decl ared. Low bit-error rates (10 7 t hrough 10 9 ) are restricted t[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 293 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation An alarm condition is not automatical ly cleared until the sy stem no longer detects the respective bit error threshold during the correspond ing duration period. For example, if AL1 threshold of 6 (representin g 10-6) is specified, and a durati[...]

Page 294 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: If the duration period set is to o long, the LEI card is slow to return to service automatically even when the carrier is no longer experiencing errors. The CLEAR ALARM (C A) command has to be entered manually to rest ore serv ice promptl y. T[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 295 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation When the far-end terminates a call, Re l ease 1 of LEI’s AB vintage send s a disconnect message to the terminal equipment and waits for the terminal equipment to go idle before going idle itself. A NO re sponse to the S S command configures Re[...]

Page 296 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 However, responding to this prompt wi th 2 selects “Table” and allows the user to set the A/B Bit Mode to what ever configurati on the user chooses. If “Table” is selected, the individual ta ble values will is prompted for. See Figure 50 on [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 297 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Idle SEND – T his is the value that the LEI se nds (acting as the CO or PSTN) when the circuit is in the idle st ate. This value is required. Idle RECEIVE – T his is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE when it is in the idle s[...]

Page 298 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 unable to accept new calls. Set th is value to N if this stat e is not needed. If this value is not set to N, then dip switch #2 po sition 6 will determine wh ether off-hook or on-hook is sent to the M1/SL100 when this state is entered. See Table 99[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 299 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Incoming call Ringer ON SEND – Th is is the value that the LEI sends t o indicate that a call is inco ming to the CPE and that ringi ng voltage should be applied at the CPE. This value is required. Incoming call Ringer OFF SEND – This is the[...]

Page 300 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Outgoing call DIAL BREAK RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE during the break part of the digit. This value is required. Outgoing call ANSWERED SEND – This is the value that the LEI will send to indicate that the[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 301 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 52 Display Configuration (D C) screen Alarm operation and reporting The MMI monitors the E1 link according to parameters established through the Set Alarm command for the following conditions: • Excessive bit error rate • Frame slip e[...]

Page 302 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 seconds, neither a loss of signal, out-of-frame condi tion, or blue alarm condition occurs. If a repeating device loses signal, it i mmediately begi ns sending a n unframed signal of all ones to the far-end t o in dicate an alarm condition. This con[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 303 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 53 Display Alarm (D A) scr een The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by entering D A P . If there is more than one screen in the log, the MMI scrolls the log until the screen is full, then stops. Wh en ready to[...]

Page 304 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 54 Display Status (D S) screen Performance counters and reporting The MMI monitors the performance of the E1 link acco rding to several performance criteria including errored, bursty, unavailable, loss-of-frame and frame-slip seconds. It regi[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 305 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • Loss-of-frame seconds are seco nds in which loss-of-frame or loss-of-signal conditions hav e exis ted for three cons ecutive seconds. • Frame slip seconds are s econds in which one or more frame sli ps occur. The MMI also maintains an over[...]

Page 306 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by entering D P P . If more than one scr een is to be displaye d, the MMI scrolls unti l the screen is full, then stops. When ready to see the next screen, press any key. The display [...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 307 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T esting The T est C arrier (T) command allows tests to be run on the LEI, the E1 li nk, or the CPE device. The three tests are designed to provide the capability to isolate faulty conditions in any of these three sources. See Table 108 on page [...]

Page 308 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Table 108 shows which test to r un for the associated equipment. Test 1, local l oopback, loops th e E1 link signaling toward itself at the backplane connector. Test data is gene rated and received on all timeslots. If this test fails, it ind icates[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 309 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 60 MMI External loopback test Test 3, network loopback, loops the LEI's received E1 data back toward the CPE. No test data is generated or receiv ed by th e LEI. If test 2 passes but test 3 fails, it indicates that the CPE device is [...]

Page 310 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Applications The LEI is an IPE line card that provides cost-e ffective connection between E1-compatible IPE and a CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 system or off-premise extensions over long distances. Some examples of applica tions where an LEI ca[...]

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Linesid e E1 Interface cards Page 311 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation send a call to the VRU, and, because the LEI supports anal og (500/2500-type) telephone functionality , the VRU is able to send the call back to the syst em for further handl ing. The LEI can also be used to provide off-premise extensions to rem[...]

Page 312 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 64 LEI connection to Norstar system E1 Norstar E1 LEI Public network E1[...]

Page 313 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 318 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 314 of 906 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The CLASS modem card circuitry is moun ted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) do uble-sided printed circuit board. The card conn ects to the backplane through a 160-pin edge co nnector. The faceplate of the CLASS modem card is equipped with a red LE[...]

NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Page 315 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Bell 202 standard. The transmission is implement ed by the appropriate PCM equivalent of 1200 or 2200 Hz. Upon completion of transmitting the CND data, the CLASS Modem card sends a message to the system software to indicate successful transmission of the CND[...]

Page 316 of 906 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 04 05 06 07 16 17 18 19 16 17 18 19 module 2, 00 01 02 03 20 21 22 23 20 21 22 23 04 05 06 07 24 25 26 27 24 25 26 27 module 3, 00 01 02 03 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 04 05 06 07 T abl e 109 Time slot mappin g (P ar t 2 of 2) XCMC mappin g [...]

NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Page 317 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Electrical specifications This section lists the el ectrical characteristic of the CLASS modem card. Data transmission specifications Table 110 provides specifi cations for th e 32 transmit -only modem resources. The CLASS modem card has no direct connection[...]

Page 318 of 906 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuration The NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches. The card derives its address fr om its position in the backplane and reports that informati on back to the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 CPU through the Card LAN int[...]

Page 319 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 366 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Contents The following are the t opics in this section: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 320 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The NT5D97 DDP2 card hardware desi gn uses a B57 ASIC E1/T1 framer. The carrier specifications comply with the ANSI TI.403 specification. The NT5D97 provides an interface to the 2.048 Mbps external di gital line either directly or through an office repeater, Netw[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 321 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 112 indicates how the RR control signal operates with regard to the DDP2 status. NT5D97 faceplate Figure 65 on page 322 illustrates th e faceplate layout for the NT5D97 DDP card. The faceplate contains an enable /disable switch; a DDCH status LED; 6 x 2 [...]

Page 322 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 65 NT5D97 faceplate D-Channel LED ENET LED Trunk Disable LED Trunk Out of Service LED Near End Alarm LED Far End Alarm LED Loop Back LED Recovered Clock0#1 Recovered Clock0#2 Recovered Clock1#1 Recovered Clock1#2 External DCHI/MSDL Trunk0 / Trunk1 553-7380[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 323 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 113 External connectors and LEDs Function Faceplate Designat or Ty p e Description Switch ENB/DIS Plastic, ESD protected Card Enable/disable s witch Connectors Unit 0 Clock 0 RJ 11 Connector Connects reference clock 0 to Clock Controller card 0 Unit 0 [...]

Page 324 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The following sections provide a brie f description of each element on the faceplate. Enable/Disable Swit ch This switch is used to disable the car d prior to insertion or re moval from the network shelf. Whil e this switch is in disable posit ion, the card will [...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 325 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation LBK LEDs Two yellow LEDs indicate if a remote loopback test is being performe d on trunk port 0 or trunk port 1. The loopback indication is active when the digital trunk is in remote loopback mode. N ormal call processing is i nhibited during the remote loopba[...]

Page 326 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Port definitions Since the NT5D97 card is dual-card, it equips two ports; these ports can be defined in the following combinatio ns: Note: Each loop DPNSS can be defined in Normal or Extended addressing mode. T abl e 114 NT5D97AA/AB loops configuration Loop 0 not[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 327 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation System capacity and performance Physical capac ity Each NT5D97 DDP2 card occupies one slot on the network shelf. Each card supports two digital trunk circui ts and two network loops. The total number of DDP2 cards per system is limited by th e number of netw o[...]

Page 328 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Power requirements Table 116 lists the power requirements for the NT5D 97 DDP2 card. Cable requirements This section lists the types of cable used and the lengths required for internal and external NT5D97 DDP2 connections. Note: No additional cabling is required [...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 329 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation — NTCG03AB — NTCG03AC — NTCG03AD • DDP2 to DCH cables — NTCK46AA — NTCK46AB — NTCK46AC — NTCK46AD • DDP2 to MSDL cables — NTCK80AA — NTCK80AB — NTCK80AC — NTCK80AD A description of each type of DDP2 cable follows. E1 carrier cables NT[...]

Page 330 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Table 117 which follows lists the pin attribut es for the NTCK45AA cable. Figure 66 NTCK45AA Ta b l e 1 1 7 NTCK45 AA cable pins (P art 1 of 2) Cable Na me Description Color DDP2 pins I/O P anel pins 0 T- P R I 0 T X T runk 0 T ransmit Tip Black P1-1 P2-6 0 R-PRI[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 331 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT8D7217 (A061 7192) The NT8D7217 (50 ft.) is an 120 Ω cable for systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the 9 pin I/ O filter connector to the 9 pin NC TE connector. Table 118 which follows lists the pin attributes for th e NT8D7217 cable. 1 G[...]

Page 332 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NTCK78AA (A0618294) The NTCK78AA (50 ft.) is an 120 Ω cable for connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin ma le) to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) (P2, P3 D-type 15 pin males). The NTCK78AA is used for systems not equipped with an I/O f[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 333 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 119 lists the pin attri butes for the NTCK78AA cable. NTCK79AA (A0618296) The NTCK79AA (40 ft) is a 75 Ω coaxial cable for connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pi n male) to the Line Terminating Unit (LTU) (P2, P3, P4, P5 BNC mal[...]

Page 334 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Table 120 lists the pin attri butes for the NTCK79AA cable. Figure 69 NTCK79AA Ta b l e 1 2 0 NTCK79 AA cable pins (P art 1 of 2) Cable Name Description Color DDP2 pins NCTE pins 0 T- P R I 0 T X T runk 0 T ransmit Tip Red P1-1 P2 inner conductor 0 R-PRI0TX T run[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 335 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Reference cl ock cables The NTCG03AA (14 ft), NTCG03AB (2.8 ft), NTCG03AC (4.0 ft), or NTCG03AD (7 ft), is a DDP2 card to Clock Controller cable, connectin g each of the CLK0 or CLK1 ports on th e DDP2 faceplate to the primary or secondary source ports on Cloc[...]

Page 336 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • NTCK46AC (35 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable • NTCK46AD (50 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable External MSDL cable The NTCK80 cable connects the DDP2 card to the NT6D80 MSDL card. The cable is available in four different sizes: • NTCK80AA (6 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable • N[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 337 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Cable diagrams Figure 73 on page 338 and Figure 74 on page 33 9 provide examples of typical cabling configur ations for the DDP2. Figure 73 shows a typical DDP2 cabling for a system with an I/O panel, with the connection between the I/O panel and a Network Cha[...]

Page 338 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 73 DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel LED's Switch DCH Trunk 553-8489 clk0 Port 0 clk1 clk0 Port 1 clk1 NCTE (MDF or L TU) NCTE NT8D7217 cable NT8D7217 cable Clock Controllers NTCK78AA/NTCK79AA cable NTCK80 cable to MSDL or NTCK48 cable to DCHI [...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 339 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 74 DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel LED's Switch DCH Trunk 553-7400 clk0 Unit 0 clk1 clk0 Unit 1 clk1 NCTE (MDF or L TU) Clock Controllers NTCK78AA/NTCK79AA cable NTCK80 cable to MSDL or NTCK48 cable to DCHI NT6D80 MSDL or NT6D11AF/NT5K7[...]

Page 340 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description NT5D97 circuit card locations Each NT5D97 card requires one slot on a shelf. N T5D97 cards can be placed in any card slot in the network bus. Note in all cases - If an NT8D72BA/NTCK43 card is being replaced by a DDP2 card, the D-channel Han[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 341 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The following parameters are set by DIP switches. The boldface font shows the factory set-up. LBO Setting S5 S11 S6 S12 S7 S13 Receiver Interface S8 S14 General Pur pose S9 S15 T abl e 121 DIP switch settings for NT5D97AA/AB (P art 2 of 2) Card Tr u n k s 0 an[...]

Page 342 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 75 Dip switches fo r NT5D97AA/AB[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 343 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AA/AB Impedance level and unit mode The S9/S15 switch selects the impedance le vel and loop operation mode on DEI2 OR PRI2. Ref er to Table 122 . Transmission mode A per-trunk switch (S4/S1 0) provides selection of the digita[...]

Page 344 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: Do not change this setup. Receiver impedance A per-trunk set of four DIP switch es (S 8/S14 p rovides selection between 75 or 120 ohm values. Refer to Table 125. Ring ground switches for NT5D97AA/AB A set of four Dip switches (S2) select s which Ring lines [...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 345 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughter board for NT5D97AA/AB In case of an on-board NTBK51AA D-ch annel daughterb oard, set of four switches (S3) provide t he daughterboard address. Refer to Table 13 4 on page 350 . Note: Switch 8 of S3 (S3-8) does no[...]

Page 346 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 2 OFF ON OF F OFF 3 ON ON OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF ON OFF 5 ON OFF ON OFF 6 OFF ON ON OFF 7 ON ON ON OFF 8 OFF OFF OFF ON 9 ON OFF OFF ON 10 OFF ON OFF ON 11 ON ON OFF ON 12 OFF OFF ON ON 13 ON OFF ON ON 14 OFF ON ON ON 15 ON ON ON ON Note 1: The system contains a maxim[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 347 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NT5D97AD DIP switch settings The the NT5D97 DDP2 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for trunk parameters settin gs for port0 and port1 respectively. Addition ally, the DDP2 card is equipped with one set of four DIP swit ches for the Ring Ground set[...]

Page 348 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 76 Dip switches locations for NT5D97AD 1 234 S2 123 4 S10 1 234 S3 123 4 S13 1 234 S4 123 4 S14 1 234 S5 123 4 S15 1 234 S6 123 4 S1 1 123 4 S7 1234 S12 1234 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 S8 1234 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 S9 123 4 S1 6 S1 NT 5D97A D P2 P1 Fac e Pla t e 1A B 60 AB 1 1[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 349 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Trunk interface swi tches for NT5D97AD Trunk 0 switches Switch S12 gi ves the MPU info rmation about i ts environment. Switch S2 selects the Transmission mode. Switch S3 , S4 , and S5 select LBO function. T abl e 130 General purpose switches f or NT5D97AD Swit[...]

Page 350 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Switch S6 selects the Receiver interface. Trunk 1 switches for NT5D97AD Ring ground switches for NT5D97AD Switch S16 selects which ring lines connect to ground. When set to ON, the ring line is grounded. T abl e 133 Receiver interface switches for NT5D97AD Impeda[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 351 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughterboard for NT5D97AD Switch S9 selects the NTBK51AA DCH daughter card add ress. Switch S8 is not used when the NTBK51 AA daughter card is used. S8_1-10 can be set to OFF position. T abl e 136 NTBK51AA DCH switches f[...]

Page 352 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 MSDL external card Use Table 138 to set the card address. T abl e 137 Switch settings f or MSDL external car d Switch number Function S9_1-10 X S8_1-10 X Ta b l e 1 3 8 Switch setting f or MSDL external car d (P art 1 of 2) Switch S etting DNUM (LD 17) 1234 0 OFF[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 353 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Architecture Clock operation There are two types of clock operation - tracking mode and free-run mode. Tracking mode In tracking mode, t he DDP2 loop sup pli es an external clock reference to a clock controller. Two DDP2 loops can operate in tracking mod e, wi[...]

Page 354 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Reference clock errors CS 1000 Rele ase 4.5 software check s at intervals of 1 to 15 minutes to see if a clock controller or reference-clock erro r has occurred. (The interv al of this check can be configured in LD 73). In tracking mode, at any one time, there is[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 355 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation system switches to the back-up clock controller, without affecting which reference clock is being tracked. A reference-clock error occurs when ther e is a problem with the clock driver or with the reference clock at the far end. If the clock controller detects[...]

Page 356 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Automatic clock switching If the EREF command is selected in LD 60, tracking on the primary or secondary reference clock is automatically switched in the following manner: • If software is unable to track on the assigned primary reference clock, it switches to [...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 357 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 139 summarizes the clocking o ptions. Table 140 on p age 358 explains the options in more detail. T abl e 139 Clock Contro ller options - summar y CC Option CPU T ype Notes Option 1 Single Ref from P0 on Clk0 Ref from P1 on Clk0 Option 2 Dual Ref from P0[...]

Page 358 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 T abl e 140 Clock Controller options - descri ption Clock Option Notes Option 1 This opti on provides a single CPU system with 2 cloc k sources derived from the 2 por ts of the DDP2. Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 0. Connector Clk0 provides a cl[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 359 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Operation The following discussion describes possible scenari os when replacing a digital trunk NT8D72BA PR I2 card or QPC536E DTI2 card or NTCK43 Dual PRI card configuration with a NT5D97 DD P2 card configuration. Figure 78 Clock Contro ller – Option 1 553-[...]

Page 360 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 79 Clock Contro ller – Option 2 553-7403 Primar y Ref erence Po r t 0 DDP2 Po r t 1 Clock Controller f or CPU 0 Clock Controller f or CPU 1 Secondar y Ref 1 Secondar y Ref 2 Secondar y Ref 1 Secondar y Ref 2 J1 Sec. J2 Prim. J1 Sec. J2 Prim. Primar y Ref[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 361 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 80 Clock Contro ller – Option 3 553-7404 Primar y Ref erence Po r t 0 DDP2 Po r t 1 Clock Controller f or CPU 0 Clock Controller f or CPU 1 Secondar y Ref 1 Secondar y Ref 2 Secondar y Ref 1 Secondar y Ref 2 J1 Sec. J2 Prim. J1 Sec. J2 Prim. Primar y [...]

Page 362 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Case 1 - The two ports of a QPC414 network card are connected to two digital trunks. In this case, the QPC414 and the two digital trunks are replaced by a single DDP2 card, which is plugged into the network shelf in the QPC414 slot. Case 2 - One port of the QPC41[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 363 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Case 3 - The network shelf is full, one port of a QPC414 network card is connected to a digital trunk, and the s econd is connected to a peripheral buffer. This arrangement is repeated for another QPC414. The digital trunk s are located in a shelf that provide[...]

Page 364 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 8 Run and connect the NT5D97 cables. 9 If required, install connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted cross-connect terminal. 10 If required, designate connecting bl ocks at the MDF or wall mounted cross-connect terminal. 11 If required, install a Network C ha[...]

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 365 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 3 If the NT5D97 card is being complete ly removed, not replaced, remove data from memory. 4 Remove cross connections at MDF to wall-mounted cross-connect terminal. 5 Tag and disconnect cabl es from card. 6 Rearrange Clock Controller cables if required . 7 Remo[...]

Page 366 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • Port 0 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined to work with Loop 0 of the NT5D97 DDP2 card, and Port 1 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined to work with Loop 1 of the NT5D97. This relationship must be reflected when configuring a new DCH in LD 17 (in response to t[...]

Page 367 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 368 NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 368 of 906 NT5K02 Fl exible Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Applications The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line car d can be used for the foll owing applications: • NT5K02AA high-voltage Message Waiting analo g line card typically used in Australia • NT5K02DA ground button, low -voltage Message Waiting, analog line card ty[...]

Page 369 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 378 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 MFC signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 370 of 906 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Signaling levels MFC signaling uses pairs of frequencies to represent digits, and is divided into two levels: • Level 1: used when a call is first established and may be used to send the dialed digits. • Level 2: used after Level 1 signaling is co mpleted and may contai[...]

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 371 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation MFC signaling involves two or more level s of forward signals and two or more levels of backward signals. Separate sets of frequencies are used for forward and backward signals: • Forward signals. Level I forward sign als are dialed address digits that identify the cal[...]

Page 372 of 906 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The exact meaning of each MFC signal nu mber (1-15) within each level can be programmed separately for each trunk route using MFC. This programming can be done by the customer and allo ws users to suit the needs of each MFC-equipped trunk route. Each MFC-equipped trunk rout[...]

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 373 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Sender and receiver mode The XMFC/MFE circuit card provides the interface between the system’s CPU and the trunk circui t which uses MFC or MFE signaling. The XMFC/MFE circuit card transmits and receives forward and backward signals simultaneously o n two channels . Ea[...]

Page 374 of 906 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 XMFC sender and receiver specifications Table 143 and Table 144 provide the operatin g requirements for the NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card. These specifi cations conform to CCITT R2 recommendations: Q.441, Q .442, Q.451, Q .454, and Q.455. Ta b l e 1 4 3 XMFC sender specifications F [...]

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 375 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation XMFE sender and receiver specifications Tables 145 and Table 146 on page 376 provide the operat ing requirements for the XMFC/MFE card when it is co nfigured as an XMFE card. These requirements conform to French So cotel specifications ST/PAA/CLC/CER/ 692. T one Interrup[...]

Page 376 of 906 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Physical specifications Table 147 outlines the physical speci fications of the NT5K21 XMFC/MFE circuit card. Ta b l e 1 4 6 XMFE receiver specifications Input sensitivity: accepted: rejected: rejected: rejected: -4 dBm to -35 dBm +/- 10 Hz of nominal -42 dBm signals -4 dBmo[...]

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 377 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Cabinet Location Must be placed in the main cabinet (Slots 1-10) P ower requirements 1.1 Amps typical Environmental considerations Meets the environment of the system T abl e 147 Phys ical speci fications (P ar t 2 of 2)[...]

Page 378 of 906 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 379 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 384 NT6D70 SILC Line card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 380 of 906 NT6D70 SILC Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 B-channels transmit user voice and data information at high speeds, while D-channels are packet-switched links that carry call set- up, signaling and other user data across the network. One single DSL can carry two simultaneous voice or data conversations t o the same or t[...]

NT6D70 SILC Line card Page 381 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation A logical terminal is any terminal that can communi cate with the s ystem over a DSL. It can be directly connected to the DSL through its own physical termination or be indirectly connected th rough a common physical termination. The length of a DSL depends on the speci[...]

Page 382 of 906 NT6D70 SILC Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU. The serial control interface is an IPE bus used by the MPU to communicate with the S/T transceivers. IPE interface logic The IPE interface logic co nsists of a Card-LAN interfa ce, an IPE bus interface, a maintenance si gnal[...]

NT6D70 SILC Line card Page 383 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The transceiver circuits provide four-wir e full-duplex S/T bus interface. This bus supports multiple physical terminat ions on one DSL where each physical termination suppo rts multiple logical B-channel and D-channel ISDN BRI terminals. Idle circui t-switched B-ch ann[...]

Page 384 of 906 NT6D70 SILC Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 385 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 388 NT6D71 UILC Line card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 386 of 906 NT6D71 UILC Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Power consumption Power consumptio n is +5 V at 1900 mA. Functional description Each U interface provides two B-channels and one D-channel and supports one physical termi nation. This terminat ion can be to a Net work Termination (NT1) or directly to a single U interface t[...]

NT6D71 UILC Line card Page 387 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The serial control interface is an IP E bus that communicates with the U transceivers. IPE interface logic The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, a IPE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel inte rface, a digital pad, and a clock converter. Th[...]

Page 388 of 906 NT6D71 UILC Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 389 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 426 NT6D80 MSDL card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 390 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 that support the same functions. For ex ample, three cards supported with the MSDL (NT6D80) are QPC757 (D CHI) , QPC513 (ESDI), QPC841 (SDI) and NTSD12 (DDP). Though the MSDL is designed to coexist with other cards, the number of ports supported by a system eq uipped with MSDL [...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 391 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 82 MSDL component layout 553-5431 S9 S10 Ones Tens Port 0 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Monitor Port LED S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Card Address Switches DCE DCE DCE DCE DTE DTE DTE DTE 422 232 422 232 422 232 422 232[...]

Page 392 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description Figure 83 on page 393 illustrate s the MSDL functional block diagr am. The MSDL card is divided into fo ur major functi onal blocks: • CPU bus interface • Micro Processing Unit (MPU) •M e m o r y • Serial interface Two processing units serve as th[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 393 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 83 MSDL block diagram Address Buffer and Decoding Logic Control and Data Transceivers Interface Registers Micro Processing Unit (68020 MPU) MPU Address Decoding Logic Shared Resource Arbitrator Memory Address Counter & Buffer Shared Memory Integrated Serial Commu[...]

Page 394 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Micro Processing Unit (MPU) The MPU, which i s based on a Motoro la 68020 processor, coordinates and controls data transfer and port addressing, communicati ng via the CPU bus with the system. Prioritized int errupts tell the MPU w hich tasks to perform. Memory The MSDL card co[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 395 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Equipment em ulation mo de – Configure an MSDL port to emulate DCE or DTE by setting switches on the car d and downloading LD 17 interface parameters. I/O port electrical interface – Each MSDL port can be configured as an RS-232 or RS-422 interf ace by sett ing the swit[...]

Page 396 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 84 MSDL functional block diagram AML Loadware CPU Bus Boot Code & Loader Modules MSDL Handler System Interface Module Physical Layer (Layer 1) Handler P S O S + Meridian Mail PRI Trunk PRI Trunk System software MSDL software modules Application Module Link D-Channel [...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 397 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Data flow The MSDL transmit interface, managed by the MSDL handler, sends data from the system to the MSDL. This in terface receives packetized data from the system and stores it in the tran smit buffer on th e MSDL. The transm it buffer transports these messages to th e ap[...]

Page 398 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Card mix A system that exclusively uses MSDL cards can support up to 16 such cards, providing 64 ports. These p orts can be used to run various synchronous and asynchronous operations simultaneou sly. The system will also support a mix of interface cards (MSDL, DCHI, and ESDI f[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 399 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 148 lists the synchronous inte rface specifications and the means of configuring the interface parameters. Asynchronous transmissio n uses an intern al clock to generate the appropriate baud rate for s erial controllers . Table 149 lists asynchronous in terface specif[...]

Page 400 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Emulation mode Each port can be configured to emulate a DCE port or a DTE port by setting the appropriate switches on the MSD L. For details on how to set the sw itches, refer to “Installation” on page 40 4 of this document. DCE is a master or controlling device t hat is us[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 401 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 151 on page 402 lists RS-422 interface speci fications for EIA circuits. It shows the connector pin number, th e associated signal name, and the 3 Receiv e Data (RX) BB 104 X 4 Request to Send (R TS) CA 105 X 5 Clear to Send (CTS) CB 106 X 6 Data Set Ready (DSR) CC 10[...]

Page 402 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 supported circuit type. It al so indicates wh ether the signal orig inates at the DTE or DCE device. Implementation guidelines The following are guidelines for en gineering and managing MSDL cards: • An MSDL can be installed i n any empty net work card slot. T abl e 151 RS-42[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 403 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • A maximum of eight MSDL cards can be installed in a fully occupied module becau se of the module’s power supply limitati ons. • The Clock Controller card should not be installe d in a module if more than 10 MSDL ports are configured as active RS-232 (rather than RS-[...]

Page 404 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The internal power supply in each m odule provides DC power for the MSDL and other car ds. Power co nsumption and heat dissi pation for the MSDL is listed in Table 153. Installation Device number Before installing MSDL card s, determin e which of the devices in the system are a[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 405 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation settings shown in this figure are an exam ple of the different types of interfaces available. Your system settings may differ. T abl e 154 MSDL interface switc h settings DCE swi tch DTE switc h Interface Comment OFF OFF RS-232 DTE/DCE is software configured OFF ON RS-422 D[...]

Page 406 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 85 MSDL switch setting example S9 S10 Ones Tens Port 0 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Monitor Port LED S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Care Locking Device Card Address Select Switches I/O Port Interface Configuration DIP Switches Setting for an RS-232 interface DTE[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 407 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Installing the MSDL card Proc edure 16 Installing the MSDL card To install an MSDL card follow these ste ps: 1 Set Device Numb er S10 and S9. 2 Hold the MSDL by its ca rd-locking devices. Squee ze the tabs to unlatch the card locking devices and lift the locking device out [...]

Page 408 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Cable requirements The MSDL card includes four high- density 26-pin (SCSI II) female connectors for ports and one 8-pin miniature DIN connector for the monitor port. See Figure 86 on page 409 for a diagram of the MSDL cabling configuration. A D-Channel on the MSDL requires a co[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 409 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 86 MSDL cabling I/O panel I/O panel Q P C 7 2 0 M S D L ESDI to I/O cable (NTND27AB—6 ft.) RS-232 shielded (QCAD328— 35 ft. max.) NTND27 ISL APL applications (RS-232 cable) SDI to terminal cable PRI to I/O panel cable (NTND98AA) NTND25AA—6 ft. NTND26AB—18 ft.[...]

Page 410 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: The choices of cable to use with an MSDL card depend on what type of modem is connected. For ex ample, the NTND27 cable is used when the modem has a DB25 connection. If the modem is v.35, a customized or external ve ndor cable is required. Cable installation When the MSDL[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 411 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 5 Plug the DB15 male conne ctor end of the cab le into the J5 DB15 female connector on the PRI card. 6 Secure the connections in place with their fasten ers. 7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each connectio n. End of Procedure I/O panel connections Operations aside from PRI re[...]

Page 412 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 MSDL planning form Use the following planning fo rm to help sort and store information concerning the MSDL cards in your syst em as shown in the sample. Record switch settings for unequipped po rts as well as for equipped ports. MSDL data form Device no. Shelf Slot Card ID Boot[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 413 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Maintenance Routine maintenance consists of en abling and disabl ing MSDL cards and downloading new versions of peripheral soft ware. These activities are performe d by an authori zed person such as a system administrator. Troubleshooting the MSDL consists of determ ining p[...]

Page 414 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 A newly configured MSDL automatically enters the manually disabled state. An operating MSDL can be manually disabled by issuing the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 (step 1 in Figure 87). Entering the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 moves the card to manually disabled status and stops a[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 415 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation System disab led When the system disables the MSDL card (step 4 in Figure 87 on page 414 ), it continues to communicate and attempt maintenance procedures on the card. To stop all system communication with the card, enter DIS MSDL x to disab le it (step 5 in Figure 87 on pa[...]

Page 416 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • Recovery Threshold The MSDL card was successfully enabled by the MSDL autorecovery fun ction five times w ithin 30 minutes. Each time it was system disabled because of a pr oblem encountered during operation. • Bootloading The MSDL base software is in the process of being[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 417 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Manually controlled maintenance Use manual maintenance comm ands found in the following programs to enable, disable, reset, get the status of, and perform self-tests on the MSDL card: • Input/Output Diagnost ic Program LD 37 •P r o g r a m L D 4 2 • Link Diagnostic Pr[...]

Page 418 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Disabling the MSDL To disable an MSDL card, enter DIS MSDL x . To disable the MSDL and all its ports, enter DIS MSDL x ALL . Resetting the MSDL To reset an MSDL and initiate a limited self-test, the MSDL must be in a manually disabled state. To perform th e reset, enter RST MSD[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 419 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Manually isolating and correcting faults Problems are due to configuration erro rs that occur during installation or hardware faults resulting from component failure during operation. See “Symptoms and actions” on page 422 for more information on problem symptoms and re[...]

Page 420 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Previously operating MSDL cards Problems that occu r during no rmal operation u sually resu lt from fa ulty cards. Follow these steps to evaluate the situation: 1 Use the STAT MSDL x command to check MS DL card status. See “Displaying MSDL status” on page 418 . 2 If the car[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 421 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Replacing MSDL cards After completing MSDL troubleshooting you may determine that one or more MSDL cards are defective. Remove the defective cards and replace the m with new ones. Proc edure 19 Replacing an MSDL car d An MSDL card can be removed from and inserted into a sys[...]

Page 422 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Symptoms and actions Explained here are some of the sympt oms, diagnoses, and actions required to resolve MSDL card proble ms. Contact yo u r Nortel representative for further assistance. These explain the causes of problems and the actions needed to return the card to an enabl[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 423 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation System disabled actions These explain the causes of problems and the actions needed to return the card to an enabled state foll owing system disabling. SYSTEM DI SABLED—NOT R ESPONDING Cause: The MSDL card is not installed or is unable to respond to the messages from the [...]

Page 424 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 using autorecovery. If a diagn ostic program (overlay ) is active, the downloadin g of the MSDL bas e code occur s later. Action : Wait to see if the system will enab le the card immediately. If the MSDL is enabled, no further action is necessary. If the MSDL base code download[...]

NT6D80 MSDL card Page 425 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation SYSTEM DI SABLED—OVERLOA D Cause: The system received an excessive number of messages from the MSDL card in a certain time . If th e card in vokes overload four times in 30 minutes, it exceeds the recovery th reshold as described in “SYSTEM DISABLED—RECOVERY THRESHOLD[...]

Page 426 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 SYSTEM DISAB LED—FATAL ERRO R Cause: The MSDL card encountered a fatal error and cannot recov er. The exact reason for the fatal erro r is shown in the MSDL300 error message output to the console of TTY when the error occurred. Action: Check the MSDL300 message to find out th[...]

Page 427 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 526 NT7D16 Data Access card Content list The following are the t opics in this section: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 428 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Introduction The NT7D16 Data Access card (DAC) is a data interface card that integrates the functionality of the QPC723A RS-232 4-Port Interface Line card (RILC) and the QPC430 Asynchr onous Interface Line card (AILC). This combination allows the NT7D16 DAC to work with [...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 429 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • Wire test mode • Self diagnostics • Inbound modem pooling wit h any asynchronous modems • Outbound modem pooli ng using “dumb” modems • Outbound modem pooli ng using auto dialing mode ms Controls and indicators The LEDs on the DAC faceplate indicat e t[...]

Page 430 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Port mode This lamp lights to indicate that the port indicated is in RS-42 2 mode. If the lamp is dark, the specified port is in RS-232-C mode. Port number The number displayed specifies the port drivi ng the EIA signal LEDs mentioned above. The push-button swi tch below[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 431 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 88 NT7D16 Data Access card faceplate SD RD DTR DSR DCD RI CONNECT RS-422 2 UN SEL WIRE TEST UN0 UN1 UN2 UN3 UN4 UN5 NT7D16AA card status EIA signal monitor LEDs CONNECT P ort mode P ort number P ort select Wire test 553-5018 ON OFF[...]

Page 432 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Call Set-up abort The user may abandon the call during th e dialogue phase using one of the following me thods: • Terminal off-line This method is useful fo r RS-232-C interface only. The equipment dr ops Data Terminal Ready (DTR) to indicate an idle connection. For ex[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 433 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: If this feature is active, and th e port is connected to a DTE that holds DTR OFF w hen idle, th e port will be permanently b usied out to inbound calls following th e DTR timeout period. Inactivity timeout Once a successful data call is completed, the user&apos[...]

Page 434 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 CTS Clear T o Send 5 3 — DSR Data Set Ready 6 4 — DCD Carrier De tect 8 5 — DTR Data T er mina l Ready 20 6 — RI Ring Indicator 22 7 — T abl e 156 Wire test signal lea ds cyc le co unts Label EIA Signal Lead description Pin Cyc le count RS-232-C RS-422 Note: Th[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 435 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Independent storage of dialing parameters Two dialing parameters, DCD control, and Answer mod e, can be modified by both keyboard and Hayes dialing commands. The Hayes dialing mode also allows the user to modify the Input echo cont rol, and Prompt/Result codes transmi[...]

Page 436 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The fourth mode, gateway, is a subset of the modem mode and is not normally used. This mode is useful if the attach ed modems do not have Ring Indicator lead. The application used is inbound mo dem pooling. The different modes enable the DAC to connect to different types[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 437 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 2 (DTE) OFF “Host On” (RI) ON Fo r c e d OFF Not Hotline Modem P o ol inbound and outbound (for Hay es 1200 modem) MSB by RI 3 (DTE) OFF “Host On” (RI) ON Fo r c e d ON Hotline Modem P o ol inbound only (Hotline for Ha y es 1200 modem only) 4 (DTE) ON “K eyb[...]

Page 438 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 6 (DTE) ON “KBD On” (No RI) ON Fo r c e d OFF Not Hotline Gatewa y inb ound and outboun d (DTR is on in idle state) MSB by DCD 7 (DTE) ON “KBD On” (No RI) ON Fo r c e d ON Hotline Gatewa y inb ound only (Hotline by DCD: ON f or Hotline OFF f or VLL) (DTR is ON in[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 439 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 10 (DCE) OF F “Host On” (prompts off) ON Fo r c e d OFF Not Hotline Host similar to MCDS but does not require DTR to be ON Modes 8, 9, 10, and 11 are for RS232 Host connectivity 11 (DCE) OF F “Host On” (prompts off) ON Fo r c e d On Hotline Continuous Hotline [...]

Page 440 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Selecting the proper m ode for Modem connectivity Select modes 0, 1, 2, and 3 when the DAC is connected to different types of modems for inbound and outbound modem p ooling. In these modes, the DA C operates as a DTE, monitors the DSR, DC D, and RI control leads, and dri[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 441 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation In the case of outbo und modem pooling , the DAC answers the data call and drives the DTR lead ON (modes 0 and 1). Then the calling data module and the DAC form a transparent link betw een the calling DTE and the modem. The DTE user may then enter the appr opriate com[...]

Page 442 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 0 This mode should be selected when th e D AC is connected to a modem, except Hayes-1200, for inbound and outbou nd modem pooling (see modes 2 and 3 for Hayes-1200 modem). The modem used shou ld have the following features: Auto-answer capability This feature is req[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 443 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Auto-dial cap ability This feature is required when the modem is used for outbound modem pooli ng. It allows the modem to go off-hook and dial the remote number (such as Smartmod em Hayes-2400 or Bizcomp). Auto-reset capability This feature is required when the modem [...]

Page 444 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Programing DAC for mode 0 i n service change LD11 When used for inbou nd or outbound Modem Pool only, the DAC can be configured as R232 in LD11. When used fo r both inbo und and outbound Modem Pool, the DAC must be configured as R232; station hunti ng for the outbound mo[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 445 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 90 DAC to Modem Pool connectivity System Outbound hunting Inbound hunting DAC R232 por t 0 500/2500 line card Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 Modem 1 Modem 2 Modem 3 Modem 4 553-AAA1126 R232 por t 1 R232 por t 2 R232 por t 3[...]

Page 446 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 1 This mode should be selected when th e DAC is connected to an auto-answer modem for inbound Hot line operation. In this mod e, the DAC automati cally executes Hotline operation when RI is driven ON by the modem . The modem used should have the following features: [...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 447 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Programing DAC for mode 1 in ser vice change LD11 The DAC must be configured as R232 (t he Autodial feature key is used for this mode). The DAC must not be configured as an Asynchronous Data Module (ADM) trunk . Mode 2 This mode should be selected when the DA C is con[...]

Page 448 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: If Call Detail Recording (CDR) is required, use separate out bound and inbound Modem Pools. Mode 3 This mode should be selected when the DA C is connected to a Hayes-1200 modem for inbound Hotlin e operation. It is recommended that mo de 1 be used for inbound Hotli[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 449 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • The equipment can monitor the DTR lead (optional, depend ing on the mode selected). In modes 4, 5, 6, and 7, the DAC: • operates as a DTE • monitors the DSR • monitors DCD control leads • drives the DTR lead The RI lead is ignored. No menus or prompts are [...]

Page 450 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 4 This mode should be selected when th e DAC is connected to a gateway for inbound and outboun d operation. The characteristics of the gateways to be used with this mode are: Auto-answer capa bility This feature is required when the gateway is used for inbound opera[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 451 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation In the outbound operation, the DAC dr ives the DTR lead OF F until anothe r DM calls it for outbound accessing. The DAC answers the data call and drives the DTR lead ON. The calling DM is then transparently connected to the gateway. The DAC requires the gateway to dri[...]

Page 452 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 5 This mode should be selected when th e DAC is connected to an auto-answer gateway for inbound Hotline operat ion. In this mode, the D AC automatically executes Hotline operation when DCD is driven ON by the gateway. If the DM being called by the Ho tline operation[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 453 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Programing DAC for mode 6 in ser vice change LD 11 When used for inbound or outbound gateway access, the DAC can be configured as R232 in LD 11. When used for both inbound and outbound gateway access, the DAC must be configured as R232. When the DAC is programmed as s[...]

Page 454 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 go ON for 2 seconds and then OFF for 4 seconds until the call is answered by the host. When the host turns DTR ON, the DAC answers the call. If DM-to-DM protocol exchange is successful, the DAC drives CTS, DSR, and DCD ON. If DTR was already ON, the DAC does not drive RI[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 455 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Dynamic control of DTR This feature is required only if the host must be capable of releasing an established call. The host shou ld be able to drop an established data call by driving DTR OFF for more than 100 ms . Note: If the PBDO parameter in LD 11 is ON, then Make[...]

Page 456 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Programing DAC for mode 9 i n service change LD 1 1 The DAC must be configured as R232 or R422 (the Autodial feature is used for this mode). The DAC must not be configured as an ADM trunk. Mode 10 This mode should be selected when the DA C is connected to a host for inbo[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 457 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation This mode should be selected when the DA C is connected to a host and continuous Hotline operati on is required. In this mode, th e DAC repeatedly tries to Hotline to the Autodial DN as long as DTR is ON. When the DAC tries to Hotline to a busy Data Mo dul e, it activ[...]

Page 458 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 unless the DTR lead is driven ON by the termin al. Any terminal that drives the DTR lead ON can be used with this mode (such as VT100 or VT102). The DAC drives CTS, DSR, and DCD ON, except when a call is dropped or when control—Z is en tered during th e idle state. In [...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 459 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Mode 13 This mode should be selected when the DA C is connected to a terminal (DTE) and Hotline call origi nation is required. This mode is simila r to the operation of the ASIM when set to not-forced-DTR and Hotline. In this mode, the terminal is able to Hotline to a[...]

Page 460 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 15 This mode provides a “virtual leased line” and the meaning of the “Forced DTR” switch is re-defined. This mode should be selected when the DA C is connected to a terminal (DTE) and continuou s Hotline call origin a tion is required. In this mode, the DAC [...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 461 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: If AUTB is set to ON, the BAUD parameter is not prom pted. If AUTB is set to OFF, you may select a fixed baud rate in response to the prompt BAUD. When the DAC receives a call, it adapts to the caller’s baud rate. See Table 158 for connect and disconnect proto[...]

Page 462 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Outbound modem pooling: Local DM user calls to the outbound modem access number . D A C ans wers the outbound call and drives DTR ON. Modem receives DTR and prepares to receive commands. Local DM user enters the proper commands for calling the remote modem. Remote modem [...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 463 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Mode 1 Inbound Hotline modem pools Inbound Ho tline modem pooling: Most dumb modems can be used for this application. Modem sends ri ng/no ring cycle (2 seconds ON, 4 seconds OFF) to initiate connection. D A C responds by trying to establish a Hotline call to a specif[...]

Page 464 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 3 Inbound Hotline modem pools (with forced DTR) Use this mode with Hay es 1200 modem. Inbound Hotline mo dem pooling: The D A C operation is identical to mode 1 except that DTR is alwa ys f orced ON (e xcept during disconnect). Call disconnection: Disconnection is i[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 465 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Call disconnection (D AC): D A C drops DTR if the local DM user drops the call. The Gatew a y must drop DCD . D A C drops DTR if the D A C receives a long break or three shor t breaks. The Gatewa y must drop DCD . Call disconnection (Gate way): Gatewa y drop s DCD (DC[...]

Page 466 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 6 Inbound and Outbound Gatew a y access (with f orced DTR) Inbound and Ou tbound Gate way pr otocol: The D A C operation is identical to mode 4 except that DTR is alwa ys f orced ON (e xcept during disconnect). The establis hment of the outbound call does not re qui[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 467 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Mode 8 Host access f or call origina tion and answering Host answering an in coming data call : Local DM user dials the access number to initiate the connection. D A C responds by driving RI ON for 2 second s and OFF f or 4 seconds until the Host ans wers b y turning [...]

Page 468 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Call disconnect ion (D A C): D A C drops DSR, DCD , and CTS if the local DM user releases the call. The Host should then drop the call. D A C drops DSR, DCD , and CTS if the Host send s a long break or three shor t breaks. The Host should then drop the call. Call disconn[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 469 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Mode 10 Host access f or call origina tion and answering (with f orced DTR) Host access for call origination and answering: The D A C operation is identical to mode 8 except DTR is alwa ys considered ON, ev en when the Host is driving DTR OFF . Call disconnection: D A[...]

Page 470 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Mode 12 T erminal access for call origina tion and answering T erminal answering an incoming data call: D A C drives DSR, DCD , and CTS ON in the idle state. Local DM user dials the access number to initiate the connection. D A C responds by driving RI ON for 2 seconds a[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 471 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Call disconnection (terminal): T er minal toggles DTR fro m ON to OFF (DTR must be OFF f or 100 ms or more). The D A C turns DSR, DCD , and CTS OFF for 0.2 second and then ON. T er minal sends a long break or three shor t breaks. The D AC tur ns DSR, DCD , and CTS OFF[...]

Page 472 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Keyboard dialing Keyboard dialing is an interactive dialogue mode between the connected equipment and the DAC. This dialogue allows equi pment to give dialing commands to the DAC in order to make a data call to another far-end data port. Keyboard dialing su pports a modi[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 473 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • Autoparity to ensure that the keyboard dialing menu is readable on the data terminal during the interactive dialogue mode • Originating calls to local and remote hosts • Ring Again • Speed Call • Two answer modes for incoming calls: m anual and auto • Di[...]

Page 474 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Prompts Call processing prompts are in up per case letters only. Other prompts co nsist of both upper and lower case characters , and the dialogu e session depicts the actual upper/lower case letters used. All prompts are preceded by the Carr iage Return and Line Feed AS[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 475 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Keyboard Autobaud is allowed after th e call is placed in off-line mode. Note: If the Hayes autobaud characters A or a are sent, the DA C will enter Hayes dialing mode. Autobaud char acter detection is selected in the software. Auto parity The user can override the do[...]

Page 476 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Whenever a Primary command is expected, the user may enter the Parity command (period). If Auto Parity has already been do ne, the Invalid Command menu is presented: The user's port may be set to idle by entering CTRL Z. Any call in progress will be dropped, and any[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 477 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Autodial (A) The Autodial command allows the user to dial a predefined number stored within the local system. Th e DAC will automati cally attempt to pl ace a data call to the Auto dial number: The currently stored Autodi al number may be viewed by entering the primar[...]

Page 478 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 if the access code is less than the maxi mum number of digits allowed for the Speed Call list for the associated data DN (DDN). Note: If the Speed Call feature key is not defined in the software, you will be notified by the following : Feature key Speed Call not defined.[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 479 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation By entering S on the keyboard, you enter the Speed Call Modify m enu. The Speed Call number can also be cha nge d in t he software. Respond to the following prompt s to change the Speed Call nu mber. By entering R on the keyboard, you enter the Rem ote Loopback Modify[...]

Page 480 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 of rings. Respond to the following prom pts to enable or disab le the Manual Answer feature. By entering D on the keyboard, you enter th e DCD Modify menu. Respond to the following prompts to enable DCD as Forced or Dynamic. M <CR> Current Answ er Mode: Manual A ut[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 481 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation By entering L on the keyboard, you enter the Long Break Detect Modify menu. Respond to th e following prompts to enable or disable th e detection of the Long Break as an abandon signal. To exit the Modify menu, enter Q. This entry retur ns you to the Primary commands [...]

Page 482 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: If you hang up the call, or give an abandon command , Ring Again is canceled. If a Ring Again request has already b een placed, the DAC offers the option of overriding the previous request. When the called DN becomes available, the system notifies the DAC, which th[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 483 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Again prompt within a softw are determined time period, Ring Again is canceled, and the Primary Commands Menu appears. Note 1: If th e Ring Again no tice occurs during a parameter change, the prompt only appears after the change has been completed. Note 2: If the noti[...]

Page 484 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Not in service When the DAC attempts a call to a DN th at is not supported, it sends yo u a message. The call is released, and you must reenter the Au tobaud character <CR> to initiate keyboard dialing again. No response from the system Likewise, when the DAC recei[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 485 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Hayes dialing Like keyboard dialin g, Hayes dialing is an interactive di aling mode wi th the terminating equipment connected to th e NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC). In addition to the common parameters an d functions, the Hayes d ialing mode offers the following featu[...]

Page 486 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 — the DTE mode, and RI has cycled the appr opriate number of times and DCD is asserted on by the modem Note: In Gateway mode, DCD must be asserted on . In modem mode, only RI must be on. The DAC asserts DTR to the modem, and awaits DCD from the modem. Input requirement[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 487 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Result codes and messages Each input record generates a re sult code which is sent to the u ser. Only one code is sent regardless of the number of commands in the record. The reply is in one of two formats: • Numeric replies contain a one- or t wo-number cod e • V[...]

Page 488 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Baud rate detection Every command line begi ns with Baud rate detect ion. This phase allows th e DAC to determine the user equipment baud rate. During this phase, the DAC accepts only the ASCII “A,” or “a” characters. Once a valid autobaud character is detected, [...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 489 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: The parity determined here overri des the parity downloaded from the system. Also, the T (t) must be entered in the same case as the A (a). If you entered uppercase A for th e Baud Rate, you must enter upper case T for the parity. Dialing operation Like keyboard[...]

Page 490 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 For the purposes of this docu ment, when illustrat ing the prompt/response sequences, the bold type is what the user enters on the keybo ard. All other type represents the DAC output. Li kewise, “xxx xxxx,” “yyyyyyy,” or “zzzzzzz” represents numbers entered b[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 491 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation All S registers may be changed with the exception of S1, the Ring count . If an attempt is made to change this parameter, the command is accepted but no action is taken. The Ring count is the number of 6-second intervals that have expired since an inbound call has bee[...]

Page 492 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 You can view any of the S registers by issuing the following display command. Any S register can be specified through the ATS command, and the system will displ ay the current sett ing for that parameter . More than one S register can be v iewed by listing the desired re[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 493 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Reset Hayes parameters All of the Hayes dialing parameters and S registers remain even after the data call is complete. Similarly, if the dialing mode, keyb oard to Hayes or vice versa, are changed, the parameters remain as specified. The following command allows you [...]

Page 494 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 V 1 Result codes sent in V erbose format X 1 Features selection 0 - 8, 10 - 13 P — Dial method (pulse) S0 0 *?1 Manual Answer (if 0)?A uto ans wer on 1 ring S1 0 Ring co unt 0 S2 43 Escape sequence character Plus sign (+) S3 13 T er minator character Carriage R eturn ([...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 495 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Outbound calls The DAC supports two types of outbound data calls: • point-to-point data calls • calls sent through a modem without call ori gination capabilities Hayes dialing does no t provide for any al terations durin g call processing, Ring Again, or Controlle[...]

Page 496 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Issuing the On Hook command while the call is st ill ringing disconnects th e incoming call. The DAC disconnects the call and no tifies you with a NO CARRIER message. When the S0 register is set to 0, the DAC is set to manual answer, and an inbound call mu st be an swere[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 497 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation In the following example, <GT> is the Guard Time and <EC> the Escape Character defined in the S2 register. The example shows the Off Line escape sequence, the command to display an S register (Ring Count, in this case), and the command to go back on line a[...]

Page 498 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 System parameters System parameters downloaded by the switch include the type of system, the inactivity timer, and the data DN. These parameters are described below: • System type: CS 1 000S, CS 1000M, and M eridian 1 • Inactivity timeout — No timeout — 15 minute[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 499 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation — Hotline (call the Au todial number upon connection) • Wire test — Disabled (can be invoked only with front panel switch) — Enabled (start only if the DAC f irmware is id le) • Language — English — Quebec French • Keyboard di aling — Enabled (allo w[...]

Page 500 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 —D C E —D T E • Equipment type — Terminal (send prompts/replies) — Host (suppress prompts/replies) • Long Break Detect In Figure 95 on page 501 and Figure 9 6 on page 502 , the rectangles represent the settings of service change paramete rs in LD11 that affec[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 501 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 95 Operating mode se lection—RS422 PRM = Off PRM = On OPE YES Host Virtual Leased Line? Ye s No HOT = On DTR = On Hotline? HOT = On HOT = Off Ye s No Allow Autobaud? No A UTB = Off Select BA UD A UTB = On BA UD = 7 Ye s T erminal Set remaining Operate P arame[...]

Page 502 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 96 Operating mode se lection—RS-232-C Operate Mode? DEM = DTE PRM = On DEM = DCE PRM = Off DEM = DCE PRM = On OPE YES DEM = DTE PRM = Off Dynamic DCD? DCD = Off DCD = On Hotline? HOT = On AUTB = Off Select BAUD HOT = Off Virtual Leased Line? Hotline? HOT = Off D[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 503 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: Warning Tone Denied (WTD) defaults if DTA is entered. • If the DAC is u sed to call out thr ough modem pooling, where the modem pool consists of dumb modems c onnected to QMT8 SADM or QMT12 V.35 SADM, the DAC port should be configured w ith a secondary DN, whi[...]

Page 504 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Power supply Be sure that al l power requirements are met before installing the DAC. Operation may be affected by improper power and environmental condition s. EIA signals supported The DAC supports a subset of the standard signals. Only 8 leads can be brought through th[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 505 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Environmental The DAC functions fully when operat ing within the following specified conditions. See Table 166. Reliability The DAC has a predicted mean time between failure (MTBF) of 8 years at 45 degrees Celsius. The mean time to repair (MTTR) is 1 hour. Installing [...]

Page 506 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Large System In Large Systems, the DAC is fully supp orted in IPE modules. These special slots on the DAC have 24-pair cables pre-wired to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) in card slots 0-15. Any IPE sl ot will supp ort the first four ports on the DAC if connections are[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 507 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation An upgraded backplane has three shrouds for each card slot. A backplane that cannot be upgraded has only two shrouds for each card slot. Port configuration Figure 97 on page 508 shows the port configu rations for both the RS-232-C and RS-422 ports. The software conf i[...]

Page 508 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 97 NT7D16 Data A ccess Card port connectors Note: Inser t on ly one option plug per por t. 553-5234 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 } } } } } } Po r t 0 Po r t 1 Po r t 2 Po r t 3 Po r t 4 Po r t 5[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 509 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Cabling Several cabling schemes are possible for both AILC and RILC modes. Typical capacitance for 24- and 26-gauge cables is shown in the Tables 168 and 169. RS-232 and RS-422 transm ission distance is limited by the electrical capacitance of the cable. Low-capacitan[...]

Page 510 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 98 Cabling to the data equipment System I/O connector MDF (12 connectors total) 25 pair 25 pair P atch panel DB25 DB25 553-AAA1128 RJ-11 DB25 RS-232 RJ-11 AILU RS-422 DB25 DB25 DB25 DB25 DB25 DB25 25 pair Octopus cable 25 pair[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 511 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 99 shows a connection throu gh an RJ-11 or RJ-45 jack located at the data station. It is reco mmended that f our wires be used similarly to the AIM drop when using the RJ-11 jack. Another cable is required to conv ert the RJ-11 or RJ-45 i nto DB25. Note: It is [...]

Page 512 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: Use an octopus cable th at follows the pinout of the DAC , such as QCAD318A (female) and QCAD319A (male), in conjunction with a 50-pin female- to-female gender converter. Figure 100 Patch panel layout DB25 DB25 50-pin connector 50-pin connector 553-5021[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 513 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 101 Octopus cabling MDF TxD RxD GND DTR CTS DSR DCD RI TxD RxD GND DTR CTS DSR DCD RI EIA signals from the D A C (unit 0) EIA signals from the D A C (unit 5) 2 (TxD) 3 (RxD) 7 (GND) 20 (DTR) 5 (CTS) 6 (DSR) 8 (DCD) 22 (RI) 2 (TxD) 3 (RxD) 7 (GND) 20 (DTR) 5 (CT[...]

Page 514 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Backplane pinout and si gnaling Two 40-pin, and two 20-pin edge connectors conn ect the card to the backplane. The detailed pinout configurati ons are listed in Tables 170 and 171. Ta b l e 1 7 0 RS-232-C and RS-422 p inouts f or fir st thre e D A C ports (Part 1 of 2) I[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 515 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 7R 7 O-R DSR1 6 8T 33 R-G RI1 22 8R 8 G-R CTS1 5 9T 34 R-BR UNIT 2 TD2 2 RD A2 9R 9 BR-R RD2 3 RDB2 10T 35 R-S DTR2 20 SD A2 10R 10 S-R GND2 7 SDB2 Connector 11T 36 BK-BL DCD2 8 3 11R 11 BL-BK DSR2 6 12T 37 BK-O RI2 22 12R 12 O-BK CTS2 5 T abl e 170 RS-232-C and RS-42[...]

Page 516 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 1 7 1 RS-232-C and RS-42 2 pinouts for last three DA C por ts (Part 1 of 2) I/O cable Unit no. RS-232-C RS-422 Signal Patch pair or octopus Pai r Pin Pa i r color Signal Pin no. 13T 38 BK-G UNIT 3 TD3 2 RDA3 13R 13 G-BK RD3 3 RDB3 14T 39 BK-BR DTR3 20 SD A3 14R [...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 517 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuring the Data Access card LD 11 must be configured to accept th e DAC. The commands listed here must be answered. LD 20 prints out card information when requested. For a complete list of the service change prompts and responses, see Softw are Input/Output: Ad m[...]

Page 518 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 required. The defaults are bracketed, a nd may be is sued by Carriage Retur n (<CR>). LD 11 – Con figure Data Access card. ( Part 1 of 3) Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG MO V COPY Add, change, mo ve or cop y the unit TYPE: R232 R422 RS-232-C unit RS-422 [...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 519 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation HO T (OFF) ON Hotline If HO T = ON, then A UTB = OFF AU T (ON) OFF Automatic answer AU T B (ON) OFF Autobaud Prompt appears only if HO T - OFF BA UD 0-(7)-8 Baud rate, where: 0 = 110 1 = 150 2 = 300 3 = 600 4 = 1200 5 = 2400 6 = 4800 7 = 9600 8 = 19200 This prompt app[...]

Page 520 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 DLNG (ENG) FRN Data por t language, where: ENG = English FRN = Quebec French KBD (ON) OFF K eyboard di aling, wher e: ON = enabled OFF = disabled (Ha y es dialing commands will stil l work) WIRE (OFF) ON Wire test mode, where: OFF = disabled ON = enabled PBDO (OFF) ON P [...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 521 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Printing the card parameters (LD 20) By responding R232, R422, or DAC to the TYPE prompt in LD 20, you can print out the configured parameters for each port, or the entire DAC. This is useful to determine if any parameters have been altered du ring keyboard or Hayes d[...]

Page 522 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Connecting Apple Macintosh to the DAC The Apple Macintosh can be connected wi th twisted pair wire to a port of a NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) to allow access to the switching capability. The Macintosh can then access local or remote terminals, personal computers, hosts[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 523 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 102 Macintosh to DAC connection—9-pi n subminiature D Figure 103 Macintosh to DAC connection—min i-8 DIN Apple Macintosh 9-pin subminiature D 8 9 5 4 W BL BK Y RD A RDB SD A SDB MDF R3 T3 R2 T2 System D A C W BL BK Y 6-wire T eladapt cord 553-AAA1129 Apple [...]

Page 524 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Large System and CS 1000M HG upgrade The DAC can be installed directly into slots 0, 4, 8, and 12 with no cablin g changes. If other slots are required, the upgrade must be made . Follow this procedure to upgrade your cabling. You can upgrade the cablin g segment-by-segm[...]

NT7D16 Data Access card Page 525 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Segment 2 1 Leave cable K as is in slot L8. 2 Move cable end L-3 to L9-3. 3 Remove cable M from the backplane and connect ends M-1, M-2, and M-3 to L10-1, L10-2, and L10-3. 4 Add cable N to the I/O panel by connecting ends N-1, N-2, and N-3 to L11-1, L11-2, and L11-3.[...]

Page 526 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Be sure to re-label the MDF to show that the module has been upgraded to provide one cable for each IPE slot. The resulting backplane and cable arrangement should look like this: Backplane slot-connector I/O panel cable position L0 A L1 B L2 C L3 D (new cable) L4 E L5 F [...]

Page 527 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 544 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 528 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The Digital Line card provides 16 voice and 16 data communicati on links. NT8D02 Digital Line card The 32 port NT8D02 Digital Line card is supported in the MG 1000S and MG 1000S Expansion. You can install th is card in any IPE slot. NTDK16 Digital Line card [...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 529 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 104 Digital line card – faceplate 553-6160 Dgtl LC NT8D02 Rlse 04 Card lock latch Card lock latch LED[...]

Page 530 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description NT8D02 Digital Line card The NT8D02 digital line card is equipp ed with 16 identical units. Each unit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signali ng path to and from digital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compress[...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 531 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 105 Digital line card – block diagram Digital line interface Micro- controller 5.12 MHz clock Tx PCM DS-30X loop Card LAN link Power supplies Front panel LED Card LAN interface Tip TCM loop interface circuit Digital phone lines Line interface un[...]

Page 532 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NTDK16 Digital Line card The NTDK16 digital line card is equipped with 48 i dentical units. Each unit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signali ng path to and from digital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplex ed (TCM) [...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 533 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 106 NTDK16 DLC[...]

Page 534 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 lines carry multiplexed PC M voice, data, and signaling information as TCM loops. The purpose of each digital li ne interface circuit is to de-multiplex data from the DS-30X Tx channel into eight inte grated voice and data bitstreams. The circuits then trans[...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 535 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card control functions Control functions are provi ded by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on the digital line car d. A sanity timer is pro vided to automat ically reset the card if the microcontroller stops fun ctioning for any reason. Microcontrol[...]

Page 536 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 the sanity timer every 1.2 seconds. If the timer is not properly serviced, it times out and causes the microcontroller to be har dware reset. Circuit power The +15 V dc in put is regulated do wn to +10 V dc for use by the digital line interface circuits. The[...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 537 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Digital line interface specifications Table 173 provides a technical summary of the digital line cards. T abl e 173 NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line c ard technical summary Charac teristics NT8D02 DLC description NTDK16B A DLC description NTDK16AA DLC descript[...]

Page 538 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Power requirements The digital line card needs + 15V DC over each loop at a maximum current of 80 mA. It requires +15V, -15V, and +5V from the backplane. The line feed interface can supply power to one loop of varyi ng length up to 1070 m (3500 ft) using 24 [...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 539 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Environmental specifications Table 175 shows the environmen tal specifications of the card. Connector pin assignments Table 176 shows the I/O pin desi gnations at the backplane connector, which is arranged as an 80-row by 2-colu mn array of pins. Normall[...]

Page 540 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 16A Line 4, Ring 1 6B Line 4, Tip 17A Line 5, Ring 1 7B Line 5, Tip 18A Line 6, Ring 1 8B Line 6, Tip 19A Line 7, Ring 1 9B Line 7, Tip 62A Line 8, Ring 6 2B Line 8, Tip 63A Line 9, Ring 6 3B Line 9, Tip 64A Line 10, Ring 64B Line 10, Tip 65A Line 11, Ring 6[...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 541 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuration This section outlines the pr ocedures for configuring the switches and jumpers on the NT8D02 Digital Li ne card and configuring the system so ftware to properly recognize the card. Figu re 107 on page 542 shows where the switches and jumper[...]

Page 542 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 107 Digital line card – jumper block and sw itch locations 553-6161[...]

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Pag e 543 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 108 Digital line card – jumper block and sw itch locations 553-6161[...]

Page 544 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 545 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 546 NT8D03 Analog Line card Overview The NT8D03 Analog Line card provides an interface for up to 16 analog (500/2500-type) tel ephones. It is equipped with an 8051-family microprocessor that performs the following fun ctions: • control of card operation • card identification •s e l f -[...]

Page 546 of 906 NT8D03 Analog Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 547 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 564 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 548 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: A maximum of four NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line cards per MG 1000S and four NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line cards per MG 1000S Expansion are supported . Cards later than vintage NT8D 09AK support µ-Law and A -Law companding, and provide a 2[...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 549 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Physical description The circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm. by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The NT8D09 Analog M essage Waiting Li ne card circuits connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connect or. The backplane is cabled[...]

Page 550 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 109 Analog message waiting line card – faceplate 553-6165 Anlg M/WL C NT8D09 Rlse 0x Card lock latch Card lock latch LED[...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 551 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card also provi des: • 600 ohms balanced terminatin g impedance • analog-to-digital and digital-t o-analog conversion of transmission and reception signals for 16 audio phone lines • transmission and recept[...]

Page 552 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 110 Analog message waiting line card – block diagram Input/ output interface control Micro- controller DS-30X interface 5.12 MHz clock Tx PCM Async card LAN link Front panel LED Card LAN interface Line interface unit power Rx PCM 1 kHz frame sync[...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 553 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card interfaces The analog message waiting lin e card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintenance data ove r the card LAN link. These interfaces are discussed in “Intelligent Peripheral Equi pment” on page 32 . Line interface[...]

Page 554 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Card control functions Control function s are provided by the following: • a microcontroller • a card LAN interface • signaling and control circuits on the analog messag e waiting line card Microcontroller The analog message waiting line card co nt [...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 555 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Analog line interface Input impedance The impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms with a ret urn loss of: • 20 dB for 200-500 Hz • 26 dB for 500-3400 Hz Insertion loss On a station line-to-li ne connection, the total insertio n loss at 1 kHz is 6 dB[...]

Page 556 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Table 179 provides a technical sum mary of the analog message w aiting line card. Ta b l e 1 7 9 NT8D09 Analog Message W aiting Line card tec hnical summary Impedance 600 ohms Loop limit (excluding set) 1000 ohms at nominal -4 8 V (e xcluding set) Leakage[...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 557 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements Table 180 provides the power requi rements for the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card. Foreign and surge voltage protections In-circuit protection against power line crosses or ligh tning is not provided o n the NT8D09 Analog M[...]

Page 558 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Overload level Signal levels exceeding +7 dBm applied to the tip and ring cause distortion in speech transmission. Environmental specifications Table 181 lists the environmental sp ecifications for the analog message waiting line card. Connector pin assig[...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 559 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Installation and Configuration (553-3021-2 10) for cable pinout information at the I/O panel. T abl e 182 Analog messag e waiti ng line c ard – backplane pinouts Bac kplane pinout* Lead designation s Backplane pinout* Lead designati ons 12A Line 0, [...]

Page 560 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 111 Analog messag e waiting li ne card – typical cross connection example 553-AAA1131 NT8D37 IPE Module Slot 0 NT8D09 Message Waiting Line Card 0T 0R 1T 1R 26 1 27 2 System Cross-connect OPS or ONS telephone connections with message waiting lamps[...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 561 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuration This section outlines the pr ocedures for configuring the switches and jumpers on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card and configuring the system software to properly recognize th e card. Figure 112 on page 563 shows where the swi[...]

Page 562 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 the system for port -to-port loss. See Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for LD 97 service change instruct ions. T abl e 183 T ransmission Profile Changes Vintage A/D con vertor gain D/A con vertor gain Pre vious to AK –3.5 dB –2.5 [...]

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Li ne card Page 563 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 112 Analog message waitin g line card – jump er block and switch location s 553-6166[...]

Page 564 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 565 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 626 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 566 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card interf aces eight analog trunk lines to the system. Each trunk interface is independe ntly configured by softwa re control using the Trunk Administrati on program LD 14. You can install th is card in any I PE slot. Note: Each MG 1000S [...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 567 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 184 lists the signaling and trunk types supp orted by the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Physical description The trunk and common multi plexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The NT8D14 Universal Tru[...]

Page 568 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red Light Emitting Diode (LED). See Figure 113 on page 569 . When an NT8D14 Univ ersal Trunk card is installed, the LED rem ains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test r uns. If the self-test is successful, the LE[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 569 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 113 Universal trunk card – faceplate S Univ Trk NT8D14 Rlse 0x Card lock latch Card lock latch This symbol indicates that field-selectable jumper strap settings are located on this card LED 553-6195[...]

Page 570 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description Figure 114 shows a block diagram of the majo r functions contai ned on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Each of these functio ns is described on the following pa ges. Figure 114 NT8D14 Universal trunk card – block diagram Input/ output interf[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 571 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card interfaces The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card pa sses vo ice and signaling data over DS-30X loops, and maintenance data over the card LAN link. Th ese interfaces are described in “Intel ligent Peripheral Equipment” on page 32 . Trunk interface units The NT8D[...]

Page 572 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Card control functions Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface, and signaling and control circuits on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Microcontroller The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card contai ns a microcontroller that control s the int[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 573 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation provides the means for analog loop terminations to establish, supervise, and take down call connections. Signaling interface All trunk signaling me ssages are th ree bytes long. The messages are transmitted in channel zero of the DS-3 0X in A10 format. Configurati[...]

Page 574 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 receive digits, it returns a dial tone. Outward address signaling is then applied from the system in th e form of loop (in terrupting) dial pulses or DTMF ton es. Polarity-sen sitive/-i nsensitive packs f eature The CS 1000 Release 4.5 software provides the polarity-[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 575 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 116 Loop start call connection sequence – incoming call from CO/FX/WATS A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Idle B goes on hook A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end Meridian 1 B Far end CO High-resistance loop High-resistance loop High- resistance[...]

Page 576 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 For trunks not equipped wit h answer supe rvision, the PIP class of service is enabled and call-duration recording begi ns immediately up on near-end trunk seizure. The PSP and PIP classes of service are enabled in the Trunk Administration prog ram LD 14. Figure 117 [...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 577 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 118 Ground start call connection sequence – inco ming call from CO/FX/WATS A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Call presented to console loop key Console answers B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end Meridian 1 B Far end CO Tip [...]

Page 578 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ground star t operation Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented throu gh software download messages. I n the idle state, the ti p conductor from th e CO is open and a high-resistance negative battery is present on the ring lead. Incoming call[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 579 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation A trunk identified as possibly reverse-wired is switched by the software to loop start processing after the second ring. This switching takes place on a call-by-call basis. Thus, if a previo usly correctly wired trunk becomes reverse-wired, the next incoming call [...]

Page 580 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 120 Ground start call connection sequence – inco ming call from CO/FX/WATS A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Call presented to console loop key Console answers B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end CO Tip open/ b[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 581 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation reverse-wired trunk becomes correctly wi red, the first subsequent call clears the threshold counter and norm al gro und start processing is implemented . Note 1: The far-end can reverse battery and ground upon receipt of attendant answer. Note 2: The near-end pro[...]

Page 582 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 121 Ground start call states – outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS System (near) end High-resistance loop Ground on ring Forced near end disconnect Loop pulsing or DTMF Forced far end disconnect Near end originates Dial tone CO toll denial Idle Near end disconnects [...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 583 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 122 Ground start call connection sequence – outg oing call to CO/FX/WATS A State Idle Idle B rings Trunk seizure Dial tone from CO B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end CO Tip open/ battery on ring Tip open/[...]

Page 584 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Direct inward dial operation Incoming calls An incoming call from the CO places a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 123 on page 585 and Fi gure 124 on page 586 . Dial pulses or DTMF tones are then presented from the CO. When the called par[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 585 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 123 DID trunk, loop DR call s tat es – incoming call from CO Far end originates Battery-ground or loop pulsing or DTMF (Note) Note: The near end may be configured for immediate start, delay dial, or wink start. Forced far end disconnect Forced near end di[...]

Page 586 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 124 DID trunk, loop DR call c onnection sequence – incomi ng call from CO A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing A rings B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end CO High- resistance loop Address signaling High[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 587 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 125 Two-way, loop DR, T IE tr unk call states – incoming call from far-end PBX Battery-ground or loop pulse, or DTMF Far end originates Idle Far end hangs up (Note) Far end disconnects first Far end disconnects first Far end disconnects Near end disconnec[...]

Page 588 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 126 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trun k call connection sequence – inco ming call from far- end PBX A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing A rings B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end System Address signaling Hig[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 589 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Outgoing calls In an outgoing call configuratio n, the NT8 D14 Universal Trunk card is connected to an existing PBX by a ti e trunk. See Figure 127 on page 590 and Figure 128 on page 591 . An outgoing call from the near-end seizes the trunk facility by placing a l[...]

Page 590 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 127 Two-way, loop DR, T IE tr unk call states – outgoing call to far-end PBX System (near) end Far end PBX High-resistance loop Ground on tip, battery on ring Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Battery-ground or loop pulse or DTMF [...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 591 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 128 Two-way, loop DR, T IE trunk call connection sequence – outg oing call to far-end PBX A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing B rings A goes on hook Idle B goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end PBX Address signaling High-r[...]

Page 592 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 129 Two-way, loop DR, T IE tr unk call states – outgoing call to far-end PBX System (near) end Far end PBX High-resistance loop Ground on tip, battery on ring Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Battery-ground or loop pulse or DTMF [...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 593 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 130 Two-way, loop DR, T IE trunk call connection sequence – outg oing call to far-end PBX A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing B rings A goes on hook Idle B goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end PBX Address signaling High-r[...]

Page 594 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Senderized operation for DI D and two-way loop DR trunks Incoming calls If the far-end is senderized, the near -end can operate in any mode: Immediate Start (IMM), Delay Dial (DDL) o r Wi nk (WNK) start, as assigned at the STRI prompt in the Trunk Administ ration pro[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 595 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 131 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk ca ll states – incoming call th rough senderized, tand em PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk System (near) end Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Battery-ground or loop pulsing, or DTMF (Note 1) Far end [...]

Page 596 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 132 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk ca ll states – incoming call th rough senderized, tand em PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk System (near) end Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Battery-ground or loop pulsing, or DTMF (Note 1) Far end ori[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 597 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: Pseudo-answer supervision is provided by n ear-end at expiration of end-of-dial timer. Wher e no far-end answer supervisio n is provided, the party at the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-end call termination. Outgoing automatic, i ncoming dial operat[...]

Page 598 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 133 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk ca ll states – outgoing call thro ugh far-end PBX to CO/FX/WATS System (near) end Far end High-resistance loop Ground on tip, battery on ring Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Battery-ground or loop[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 599 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 134 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call st ates – incoming call from far-end PBX System (near) end Low-resistance loop High-resistance loop Far end originates Battery-ground or loop pulses, or DTMF Far end Far end disconnect Forced near end disconnects Idl[...]

Page 600 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 135 Two-way, loop OA ID, TIE trunk call connection sequence – inco ming call from far-end PBX A State Idle Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing A rings B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end PBX High- resistance loop A[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 601 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 136 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states – outgoing call to far-end PBX System (near) end Near end originates Far end disconnect Near end disconnect Idle Near end disconnects first Far end answers 553-AAA1147 Far end disconnects first Ground on tip, [...]

Page 602 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 137 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trun k call connection sequence – ou tgoing call to far-end PBX A State Remarks Signal/direction Near end System B Far end PBX High- resistance loop Low-resistance loop High-resistance loop High-resistance loop Ground on tip/ batt[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 603 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Recorded announcement trunk operation Note: Refer to “Multi-Chan nel RAN modes” on page 605 for information on Multi-Ch annel RAN modes, which are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk. When configured for Recorded Announcement (RAN) operation, a trunk [...]

Page 604 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 138 Connecting RAN equipment to the NT 8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical) Typical customer- provided external equipment Cross connect System NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 7 NT8D37 IPE Module MDF 0T Slot 0 A 26 (W-BL) Announcer 0R 1 (BL-W) 0CP[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 605 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation RAN modes of operation Figure 139 on page 606 shows the relati onship of control signa ls to message playback for the operating modes available in announ cement machines. Th e signal names shown in Figure 139 are typical. Note 1: For continuous operation mode, con[...]

Page 606 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The Route Data Block LD 16 is used to configure a RAN route in Multi-Channel Level Star t/Control mode, using the following response: RTYP = MLSS Figure 139 RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE) — Continuous operation mode — C ST+ input to announcer hardwired [...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 607 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Trunk members are provisioned in the Trun k Data Block LD 14. Refer to “Programming RAN trunks” on page 608 and to Software Input/ Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for instructions on service change programs. Continuous operation mod e In the continuous o[...]

Page 608 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Call routing to RAN trunks CS 1000 Release 4.5 software control s recorded announcement machines. These programs detect the calls to be intercepted, determine the type of intercept treatment required (for example, overflow, attendant, announcement), queue the interce[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 609 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Electrical specifications Table 185 gives the electrical characteris tics of the NT8D14 Universal Trun k card. T abl e 185 Universal trunk card – trunk interface electrical characteristics (Part 1 of 2) T runk T ypes Characteristic CO / FX / W A TS DID / TIE RAN[...]

Page 610 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Power requirements Power to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk car d is provid ed by the mo dule power supply (ac or dc). Line leakage Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-grou nd N/A N/A AC induction reject[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 611 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Foreign and surge voltage protection The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card m eets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage (power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements. Environmental specifications Table 187 lists the environmental sp ecifications for the NT8D14 Unive[...]

Page 612 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The class-of-service determines the operation of the switchable PADs contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows: • Transmission Compensated — used for a two-wire non-VNL trunk faci lity with a lo ss of greater than 2 dB for which impedance compensat ion[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 613 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The insertion loss from IPE ports to IPE ports is as follows: T abl e 188 Insertion Loss from IPE P or ts to IPE P orts (measured in dB) IPE P orts IPE P orts 500/2500 Line Digital Line 2/4 Wire E&M T runk 4 Wire (ESN) E&M Tr u n k CO/FX /W A TS Loop Tie T[...]

Page 614 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Connector pin assignments The universal trunk card connects the eight analog trunks to the backplan e through a 160-pin con nector shroud. Telep hone trunks connect to the universal trunk card at the back of the MG 1000S using a 25-pin connector. A list of the connec[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 615 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuration The trunk type for each unit on the card as well as its terminating impedance and balance network configuration is se lected by software service change entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap sett ings on the card. NT8D14 has a reduced jum[...]

Page 616 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 1 9 0 Jum per strap setti ngs – factory stand ard (NT8 D14B A, NT8D1 4BB) T runk type s Loop length Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) CO/FX/W A TS 0–1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 1–2 2-wa y TIE (LDR) 2-wa y TIE (O AID) DID 0[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 617 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 191 Jum per strap setti ngs – e xtended ra nge (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB) T runk type s Loop length Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) CO/FX/W A TS > 1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 2–3 2-wa y TIE (LDR) 2-wa y TIE (O AID[...]

Page 618 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Jumper strap settings For most applicatio ns, the jumper strap settings remain set to the standard configuration as shipped from the factory. See Table 190 on page 616 . The jumper strap settings must be changed, as shown in Table 191 on page 617 , for the f ollowing[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 619 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • DID trunks exceeding a loop resistance of 600 ohms • RAN trunks operating in pulse st art or level start modes Figure 140 on page 620 shows jumper locations on the universal trunk card (vintage BA ). Service change entries The trunk type, terminating impedan[...]

Page 620 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 140 Universal trunk card – jumper locations (for NT8D14BA, NT8D14B B Release 9 and below) J1.4 J2.4 3 1 J4.4 3 1 J3.4 J1.5 J2.5 31 J3.4 31 J4.5 J1.1 J2.1 31 J3.1 31 J4.1 J1.6 J2.6 13 J4.6 13 J3.6 J1.7 J2.7 13 J4.7 13 J3.7 J1.3 J2.3 3 1 J4.3 Unit 3 Unit 1 Uni[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 621 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 193 T runk types – terminati on impedance an d balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) T runk types T erminating impedance (Note 1) Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) 0–915 m (0–3000 ft) 915–1524 m (3000–5000 ft) > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) CO[...]

Page 622 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Port-to-port lo ss configuration Loss parameters are selected on th e NT8D14 Universal Trunk card by a switchable pad controlled by codec emul ation software. For convenience, the pads settings are called “in” and “out.” Pad settings are det ermined by the tw[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 623 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows: • TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facili ty with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which impedance com pensation is provided, o r [...]

Page 624 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Applications The optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each trunk are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks. Paging trunk operation A universal trunk card unit can be confi gured as a paging trunk. Configure units as paging tru[...]

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 625 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 141 Connecting paging equ ipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical) Typical customer- provided external equipment Cross connect System NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 7 NT8D37 IPE Module MDF 0T Slot 0 A 26 (w-bl) 0R 1 (bl-w) 0A 27 ([...]

Page 626 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 627 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 666 NT8D15 E & M Trunk card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 628 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: In Cabinet systems equipped with Meridian Mail, the Universal Trunk line card cannot be installed in sl ot 10 of the main cabinet. The NT8D15 E&M trunk card supports the following types of trunks: • 2-wire E&M Type I signaling trunks • two-wire dial r[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 629 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Physical description The line interface and co mmon multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The E&M trunk card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. External equipment conne[...]

Page 630 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 142 E&M trunk card – fac eplate S E & M Dict Trk NT8D15 Rlse 05 Card lock latch Card lock latch This symbol indicates that field-selectable jumper strap settings are located on this card LED 553-6199[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 631 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Functional description The NT8D15 E&M Trunk card serves various transmission requirements. The trunk circuits on the card can operate in either A-Law or µ-Law companding modes. The mode of operation is set by service chan ge entries. Figure 143 on page 632 sho[...]

Page 632 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • Software co ntrol of A /µ-Law mode. • Software control of digit collection. Figure 143 E&M trunk card – blo ck diagram Input/ output interface control Micro- controller DS-30X interface 5.12 MHz clock Tx PCM Async card LAN link Front panel LED Card LAN int[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 633 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card interfaces The E&M trunk card passes voice and signal ing data over DS-30X loops an d maintenance data over t he card LAN link. The E&M trunk card contains four identical and in dependently configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circui[...]

Page 634 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Trunk circuit features Trunk unit functions The functions provided by each unit on the E&M trunk car d include 2-wire signaling, 4-wire signaling, and paging operatio n as follows: • 2-wire, E&M Type I signaling (see Figure 144 on page 635 ) wi th: — near-e[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 635 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 144 E&M Type I signaling E E&M trunk card External signaling circuit M E M 553-6258 Ð 48V Ð 48V[...]

Page 636 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 145 E&M Type II signaling Ð 48V SG E M SB Ð 48V SG E P P M SB 553-6259 Note: M, SB, E, and SG designations are Electronic Industries Association and Telecommunications Industries Association (EIA/TIA) conventions. These leads are also known as MB, MA, EA, [...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 637 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 146 4-wire DX signaling Tip B T1 J3 J5 T2 (Note 2) Ring B a b Tip A Ring A a b Distant circuit electromechanical (may also be Succession 1000M, Succession 1000, or Meridian 1) Local system circuit Ð 48V Ð 48V 4 8 553-AAA1151 1100 Ω (Note 1) K1 R C R eq 1[...]

Page 638 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 147 Paging trunk operation Typical customer- provided external equipment Cross connect System NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 3 NT8D37 IPE Module MDF 0T Slot 0 A 26 (W-BL) 0R 1 (BL-W) 0A 27 (W-O) 0PG 2 (O-W) Module I/O Panel Connector Part of 25-pai[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 639 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Card control functions Control functi ons are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN, and signaling and control circuits on the E&M trunk card . Microcontroller The E&M trunk card contains a microcon troller that controls the internal operation of the ca[...]

Page 640 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Signaling interface All signaling messages for the trunk are three bytes long. Th e messages are transmitted in channel zero of the DS30X in A10 format. Configuration infor mation for the E & M trunk is download ed from the CPU at power up and by command from m ain[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 641 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • monitor signals from the trunk in terface and generate a message when required for each state change • control disabling and enabling of uni t or card • control A-Law and µ-Law o peration modes • control transmission pad settings Maintenance features The[...]

Page 642 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Idle state For E&M signaling, in the idle state the M lead is ground and the E lead is an open circuit. Outgoing calls are processed as follows: • The M lead changes from ground to battery. — If answer supervisio n is provided by the far end, there is a change [...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 643 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 149 E&M Type I signaling pattern s – originating party release Near end M lead Near end E lead Idle Near end disc first Near end disc Dialing Near end seizes Far end answers (ans sup) Far end answers (no ans sup) 553-6263 Far end disc Far end disc firs[...]

Page 644 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 150 E&M Type I signaling pattern s – originating party rele ase on a tandem connection Near end M lead Near end E lead Near end stores office DN Dial CO/FX/WATS and office D CO/FX/WATS end disc first (ground start only)(ans sup) Pseudo-answer supervision p[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 645 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Incoming calls The far-end initiates calls as follows: • The ground is placed on the E lead in E&M signaling. • Dial pulses are subsequently applied from the far-end as ground open on the E lead. • If the far-end is equippe d for sending, the syst em can [...]

Page 646 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 for a tandem connection where the originat ing end is senderized and the route is over a CO trunk (CCSA not applicable). Type II signaling uses four leads: M, SB, E, and SG. Instead of changes of state between battery and ground (M signals) or open and groun d (E signa[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 647 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 151 E&M Type II sign aling pattern s – originating party release Near end M/SB leads Near end EA/EB leads Idle Near end disc first System end disc Dialing Near end seizes Far end answers (ans sup) Far end answers (no ans sup) 553-AAA1153 Far end disc F[...]

Page 648 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 152 E&M Type II s ignaling pa tterns – o riginatin g party relea se on a ta ndem connecti on Near end M/SB leads Near end EA/EB leads Near end stores office DN Dial CO/FX/WATS and office DN CO/FX/WATS end disc first (ground start only)(COS-ans sup) Pseudo-[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 649 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 198 and Table 199 show call-conn ection and take-down sequ encing for DX signaling. Table 200 on page 650 and Tab le 201 on page 651 show sequencing where the E&M trunk card is used in a tandem PBX. T abl e 198 DX signaling – outgoing calls with origina[...]

Page 650 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 F ar-end on hook first Current flow Hig h Network taken down and trunk idled No current flow High Near-end on hook first, network ta ken do wn Current flow Low F ar-end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High Ta b l e 2 0 0 DX signaling – outgoing calls w ith origi[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 651 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Near end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low F ar end on hook, trunk i dled No current flow High T abl e 201 DX signaling – incoming calls with originating party rele ase on tandem connections (P art 1 of 2) Condition Current in signaling lead Stat[...]

Page 652 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: * – CO ground start: the trunk is idled and the network taken down, but the incoming tie trun k is controlled by the origi nating end. Electrical specifications Table 202 lists the electri cal characteristics of th e trunk interface on the E&M trunk card. I[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 653 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Effectiv e loss See p ad table (T able 209 on page 662 ) See pad table (T able 209 on page 662 ) T er minating impedance 600 ohms 600 ohms Balance impedance N/A 600 o hms T abl e 203 Electrical characteristics of trunk car ds Characteristic DID T runk CO trunk Nomi[...]

Page 654 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Power requirements Table 204 lists the power requirements for the E&M trunk card. Environmental specifications Table 205 provides the environmental specifications for the E&M trunk card. Foreign and surge voltage protection The E&M trunk card meets CS03 ove[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 655 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Connector pin assignments The E&M trunk card brings the four anal og trunks to the backpl ane through a 160-pin connector shro ud.The backplan e is cabled to the I/O panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main Distrib ution Frame (MDF) [...]

Page 656 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 2 0 7 E&M trunk card – backplane pinouts for 4-wire modes Tr u n k Number 4-wire T ype I Mode 4-wire T y pe II Mode Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 0 12B TA 12A TB 12B TA 12A TB 13B RA 13A RB 13B RA 13A RB 14B E 14A M 14B EA 14A EB 15B ECG 15[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 657 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 153 E&M trunk card – typical cross connection exam ple 553-AAA1155 NT8D37 IPE Module Slot 0 NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card Unit 0 Unit 3 26 1 27 2 System Cross connect E & M trunk connections A MDF TipA TipB RingA RingB E M ECG ESCG Tip Ring E M 28 3 29[...]

Page 658 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuration Each of the four trunk circuits on th e E&M trunk card can be individually configured for trunk type, companding mo de, and port-to-port loss compensation. Configuring the card requires both jump er changes and configuration software service entries. [...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 659 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 154 E&M trunk card – jum per locations 553-6200[...]

Page 660 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 2 0 8 E&M trunk card – jum per strap setting s Jump e r (Note 1) Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk Ty p e I Paging Ty p e I T ype II DX tip & ring pair M—rcv E—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.X[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 661 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software service entries The trunk type is selected by making service change entries in Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maint enance (LD 16). The companding mode is selected by making service change entries in Trunk Data Block (LD 14). Refer to Table 208 on pa ge[...]

Page 662 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switch able pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows: • TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk faci lit y with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which imp edance compensation is prov ided, or for[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 663 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 155 Pad orientation Analog 553-AAA1156 System XMT Analog REC REC Port B E&M XMT Digital[...]

Page 664 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Applications The optional applications, features and signaling ar rangements for each trunk are assigned through uniqu e route and trunk data blocks. Refer to the Features and Services (553-3001-306) for info rmation about assign ing features and services to trunks. PA[...]

NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 665 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Table 210 shows the insertion loss from IPE port to IPE po rt. Paging trunk operation When used in the paging mode, a trunk is connected to a customer-pro vided paging amplifier system (not zone sel ectable). When the trunk is accessed by dial-up or attendant-key o[...]

Page 666 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 156 Paging trunk operation Typical customer- provided external equipment Cross connect System NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 7 NT8D37 IPE Module MDF 0T Slot 0 A 26 (w-bl) 0R 1 (bl-w) 0A 27 (w-o) 0PG 2 (o-w) Module I/O Panel Connector Part of 25-p[...]

Page 667 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 680 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 668 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • NT6D39 CPU/Network module • NT9D11 Core/Network module The SDI paddle board is comp atible with all existing system software, but can only be used with the system option s listed above. It does not support 20 mA current loop interface. Physical [...]

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 669 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 157 NT8D41AA SDI paddle b oard Option switches LED Enable/disable switch Port 1 connector (RS-232C) Option switches Port 2 connector (RS-232C) Option switches Backplane mating connectors 553-5979[...]

Page 670 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description The NT8D41AA SDI paddle board has two asynchronous serial ports. These serial ports are connected to the I/O pane l in the back of the shelf using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the system to a t[...]

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 671 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation a socket in the CPU area of the backplane allows it to work only when that CPU is active. The SDI paddle board is normally inst alled into a socket in the network area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the system processo[...]

Page 672 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuring the SDI paddle board Configuring the SDI paddle board consist s of setting these option switches for each serial port: • Port addr ess • Baud rate • DTE/DCE/Fiber mode The SDI paddle board has seven option switches, SW 2–8. Figure [...]

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 673 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Option switch settings Address Address select switch SW4 and logi c on the card always address the two UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 15 and 16. The settings for this switch are sh own in Table 212. Baud rate Switches SW2[...]

Page 674 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 DTE/DCE/Fiber mode Each serial port can be co nfigured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network card. Instru ctions for setting the switch es SW5, SW6, SW7, and SW8 are shown in Table 214 on page [...]

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 675 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 214 NT8D41AA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings Mode P ort 1 – SW5 Po r t 1 – S W 6 123456123456 DTE (terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE (modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on NT1P61 (Fiber) on on on on off of[...]

Page 676 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 159 SDI paddle board option sw itch locations 553-5988 12 34 O N ^ 12 34 O N ^ 56 12 34 O N ^ 12 34 O N ^ 12 34 O N ^ 56 12 34 O N ^ 56 12 34 O N ^ 56 DS1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW1 J1 J2 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 Address selection P or t 1 DTE/DCE mode selection P[...]

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 677 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software service changes Once the NT8D41 SDI paddle board has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recogni ze it. This is done u sing the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions fo r running the Confi[...]

Page 678 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Applications The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface paddle board is used to connect the switch to a variety of communication devi ces, printers, and peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be co nnected to either of the card’s two serial ports. [...]

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 679 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 160 SDI paddle board cabling Module front NT8D46 cable to connector J2 in the pedestal, where it will connect to the system monitor (Note 2) NT8D93 cable (Note 1) To external equipment Backplane J1 J2 NT8D84 cable N T 8 D 4 1 J1 System monit[...]

Page 680 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 681 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 694 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 682 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • NT6D39 CPU/Network module • NT9D11 Core/Network module The QSDI paddle board is compatible w ith all existing system software, but can only be used with the system options listed above. It does not su pport the 110 baud rate or the 20 mA cu[...]

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddl e Board Page 683 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 161 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board 1 234 O N ^ 1234 O N ^ 1234 O N ^ 1234 O N ^ 56 1234 O N ^ 56 1 2 34 O N ^ 56 1234 O N ^ 56 Address selection for ports 1 and 2 (See T able 6) P ort 1 DTE/DCE mode selection (See T able 7) P ort 4 DTE/DCE[...]

Page 684 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Other logi c on the card in cludes baud r ate generat ors, RS-232-C dr iver/ receiver pairs, and the switches and logic needed to co nfigure each UART. System considerations In dual-processor systems, the QSDI paddle board will behave differently[...]

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddl e Board Page 685 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The QSDI paddle board is no rmally inst alled into a socket in the network area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the system processors. This is necessary because the active CPU switches automatically each night at [...]

Page 686 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 8 CTS Clear to send (Not e 1) Cl ear to send Note 1: In DTE mode the signals CD , DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the por t on the QSDI paddle board is alwa ys ready to transmit and receive data. This mode is set to connect to [...]

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddl e Board Page 687 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Configuring the QSDI paddle board Configuring the QSDI paddl e board to wo rk in a system consists of setting these option switches for each serial port: •B a u d r a t e • Port addr ess • DTE/DCE mode The QSDI paddle board has fourteen[...]

Page 688 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 * For future use . Address Switch SW15 or SW16 and logic on the card always address the four UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 a nd 3 throug h 14 and 15. Th e settings for both switches are show n in Table 217. To avoid system probl ems[...]

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddl e Board Page 689 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation SW15 and SW16 must not be configured identically. Figure 161 on page 683 displays SW15 and SW16. * T o enable por ts 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. T o enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1 to ON. + F or each X, the setting for this [...]

Page 690 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 DTE/DCE/Fiber mode Each serial port can be co nfigured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network card. Instru ctions for setting the swi tches SW2, SW3, SW4, SW5, SW6 , SW7, SW8, and SW9 are s[...]

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddl e Board Page 691 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software service changes Once the NT8D841BA QSDI paddle board has been install ed in the system, the system software needs to be c onfigured to recognize it, using th e Configuration Record program LD 1 7. Instructions for running this progra[...]

Page 692 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Applications The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Inte rface paddle board is used to connect the switch to a variety of communicat ion devices, printers, and peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to either of the card’s two seri[...]

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddl e Board Page 693 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 163 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board cabling Module front NT8D46 cable to connector J4 in the pedestal, where it will connect to the system monitor (Note 2) NT8D93 cable (Note 1) To external equipment Backplane J1 J2 NT8D84 cable N T 8 D 4 1[...]

Page 694 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 695 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 700 NTAG26 XMFR card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 MF signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 696 of 906 NTAG26 XMFR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Table 219 lists the frequency va lues used for received signals. Ta b l e 2 1 9 MF frequency v alues Digit Back war d direction DOD-Tx, DID-Rx 1 700 Hz + 900 Hz 2 700 HZ + 1100 Hz 3 900 Hz + 1100 Hz 4 700 Hz + 1300 Hz 5 900 Hz + 1300 Hz 6 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz 7 700 Hz + 1500 Hz 8 [...]

NTAG26 XMFR card Page 697 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation XMFR receiver specifications Table 220 provides the operating req uir ements for the NT AG26 circuit card. T abl e 220 XMFR receiver specifications (P art 1 of 3) Coding: Mu-La w Input sensitivit y: must accept: 0 to -25 dBmO must reject: -35 to dBmO Frequency sensitivity: m[...]

Page 698 of 906 NTAG26 XMFR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Noise Rejection: Error Rate in White Noise Better than: < 1/2500 calls T est: 10 digit calls nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms KP duration 100 ms SNR = -20 dB all digits Immunity to Impulse Noise Better than : < 1/2500 calls T est: 10 digit calls nominal fr[...]

NTAG26 XMFR card Page 699 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The XMFR receiver specifications conform to the following: • TR-NPL-000258, Compatib ility Information for F.G.D. switched access service, Bell Communica tion Research Technical Reference, Issue 1.0, October 1985. • TR-NPL-000275, Notes on the BOC Intra-LATA Networks, Be[...]

Page 700 of 906 NTAG26 XMFR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Physical specifications The physical specifications required by the NTAG26 XMFR circuit card are shown in Table 221. Ta b l e 2 2 1 Physical specifications Dimensions Height:12.5 in. (320 mm) Depth:10.0 i n. (255 mm) Thickness:7/8 in. (22.25 mm) F aceplate LED Lit when the circ[...]

Page 701 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 708 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 702 of 906 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ports 1 and 3 are configured as DCH. Ports 0 and 2 are configured as SDI (not supported). See Table 222. Each pair is controlled by a switch, as shown in Table 223. Note: Digital Private Network Sig nali ng System DPNSS can replace the DCH function in the U.K. T abl e 222 P [...]

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Page 703 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Two ports offer the option for DTE/DCE configuratio n. This option is selected from a jumper on the card. Ta ble 224 shows the jumper settings. T abl e 224 Jumper settings Po r t Jump e r location Strap for DTE Strap for DCE Jump e r location RS422 RS232 0 J10 C - B B - A[...]

Page 704 of 906 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Connecting to the ports External devices are connected to the SDI/DCH card by the following: • the NTAK19FB four-port SDI cable. Th is cable does not have to be terminated at the cross connect te rminal since it is equipped with connectors. • the NE-A25-B cable. Terminat[...]

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Page 705 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 226 NT AK02 connections at the cro ss-connect ter minal – P ort 1 RS422 RS232 Cable Signal Designat ions I=Input O=Output Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pa i r Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 5T 5R W- S S-W SCTEA — SCT A — O — I — O — I —[...]

Page 706 of 906 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 2 2 7 NT AK02 connections at the cr o ss-connect terminal – Port 2 RS422 RS232 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output Designat ions I=Input O=Output Signal Pai r Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 13T 13R BK-G G-BK — — — — — O — I — DTR — DC[...]

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Page 707 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 228 NT AK02 connections at the cro ss-connect ter minal – P ort 3 RS422 RS232 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output Designati ons I=Input O=Output Signal Pai r Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 17T 17R Y- O O-Y SCTEA — SCT A — O — I — O — I ?[...]

Page 708 of 906 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Characteristics of the low speed port Ports 0 and 2 are asynchronous, low speed ports. They transfer data to and from the line one bit at a time. The characteristics of the low speed port are as follows: • Baud rate: 300; 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 96 00; 19,200 Default = 1200[...]

Page 709 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 720 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 710 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Physical description The DTI/PRI card uses a 9.5" by 12.5" multilayer printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers. The clock controller and D-ch annel daughterboards are fastened by standoffs and connectors. See Figure 164 o n page 710 . The NT[...]

NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 711 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The first five LEDs operate as follows: • During system power up, the LEDs are on. • When the self-test is in progress, th e LEDs flash three times and then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 229. T abl e 229 NT AK09 LED states LED State Defini[...]

Page 712 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NTAK09 DTI/PRI power on self-test When power is applied to the NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card, the card performs a self-test. The LEDs direct ly associated with the NTAK09 circuit card are DIS, ACT, RED, YEL, and LBK. The clock controller LED is also included in the powe[...]

NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 713 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NTAK93 self-test The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard LED is the bottom LED on the faceplate of the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card. The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard does not perform a self-test when power is applied to it. When power is applied, it tu rns red and remain steadily lit, i[...]

Page 714 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The NTAK09 circuit card conforms to sa fety and performance standards for foreign and surge voltage prot ection in an internal environm ent. Functional description NTAK09 provides the followin g features and functions: • configurable parameters, including A-Law and [...]

NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 715 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Architecture Signaling interface The signaling interface perfor ms an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages in both directions of transmission are three bytes long. Interconnection The interconnection to the carri[...]

Page 716 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Digital pad The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-ou tput transfer function meets the character istics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad accommodates both µ255-law and A -Law coding. There are 32 combinations each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to[...]

NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 717 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation D-channel interface The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps maxi mum, full-duplex, s e rial bit-stream configured as a DCE device. The data signals include receive data output, transmit data input, receive clock out put, and transmit clock output. The receive and tran[...]

Page 718 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 extend from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable through dip-switches. The settings are sh own in Table 232. Receiver The receiver extracts data and clock fr om an incoming data stream and outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst case D[...]

NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 719 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Clock controller interface The clock controller interf ace provides the recovered clock from the external digital facility to the clock control ler daughterboard through the back plane. Depending on the equipped state of the clock controller, th e clock controller [...]

Page 720 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 721 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 734 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 722 of 906 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Physical description The 2 Mb DTI pack uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5", multi-l ayer printed circuit board. The faceplate is 7/8” wide and contains six LEDs. The LEDs operate as follows: • After the card is plugged in, the LEDs (a-e) are turned on by the power[...]

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 723 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements The 2MB DTI obtains its power from the backplane. It draws less than 2 A on +5 V, 50 mA on +15 V and 50 mA on –15 V. Environment The NTAK10 card meets all applicable Nortel operating specifications. Functional description The NTAK10 provides the fo[...]

Page 724 of 906 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • per-channel and all-channel loopback capabilit ies for near-end and far-end •s e l f - t e s t • download of inco ming ABCD v alidation times fr om software • warm SYSLOAD (TS16 AS 16 transmitted) Applicability to France Features specific to DTI requiremen ts fo[...]

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 725 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Transmit data To transmit data on the carrier, the incoming serial bit stream from the NTAK02 circuit card is converted to 8- bit parallel bytes. The signaling bits are extracted by the si gnaling interface circuitry. Digital Pad: The parallel data is presented to the [...]

Page 726 of 906 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • controlling LEDs • downloading Local Cal ling Areas (LCAs) • monitoring errors and alarms • detecting the change of state in TS0, and outputt ing TS0 data • counting bipolar vi olations, slips, PLL alarms, frame-alignment errors, and CRC-4 errors • monitorin[...]

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 727 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation If a coaxial interface is required, use NT5K85 in con junction with the NTBK05. Channel associated signaling Channel associated signa ling means that each traffi c carrying channel has its own signaling channel perm anently associated with it. Time slot 16 is used to t[...]

Page 728 of 906 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 With the exception of the outpulsing si gnals and special signals, such as Denmark's Flash signal and Sweden's Parking signal, the minimum duration of any signal state is 100 ms. Some sign al states can have a minimum duratio n time that is longer than 100 ms. P[...]

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 729 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation converted from digit al to AMI an d sent to the carrier. A transformer provides isolation and imp edance matching (75 oh ms or 120 ohm s). Rx Direction The AMI data of the carrier is converted to digital and fed to the in put selector as well as the output selector for[...]

Page 730 of 906 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Tracking mode There are two stages to clock controller tracking: • tracking a reference, and • locked onto a reference. When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its frequency to the frequency of the inco ming clock. When the frequenci[...]

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 731 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Clock controller functions and features The NTAK10 2MB DTI clock controller functions and features include: • phase-locking to a reference, generating the 10.24 Mhz system clock, and distributi ng it to t he CPU thro ugh the backpl ane. Up to t wo references at a tim[...]

Page 732 of 906 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 secondary, but switches over to the primary whenever the primary recovers. If the primary recovers first, then th e clock controller tr acks to the primary. If the software command “track to secondary” is given, the clock controller tracks to the secondary reference a[...]

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 733 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Reference clock interface The recovered clock derived from the facility is available on the MDF connector. The signals at these c onnectors conform to the electrical characteristics of the EIA RS-422 standard. Switch settings Various 2MB DTI switch options exist on the[...]

Page 734 of 906 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 735 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 744 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 736 of 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: The card is restricted to slots 1 th rough 3 in EMC- type cabinets (such as NAK11Dx and N TAK11Fx cabinet s). It will not work in slots 4 through 10 in these cabinets. The NTAK20 clock controller card can support 1.5 Mb , 2.0 Mb, and 2.56 Mb clock rec[...]

NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Page 737 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • jitter filterin g • use of an algorithm to detect crystal agin g and qualify clocking information Clocking modes The clock controller can operate in one of two modes : tracking or non-tracking (also known as free-run). Tracking mode In tracking mod[...]

Page 738 of 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Free-run (non- tracking) In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any outside source. Instead, it provides its ow n inte rnal clock to the system. This mode can be used when the system acts as a master clock source for other systems in[...]

NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Page 739 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Functional description The main functional b locks of the NTAK20 architecture include: • phase difference detector circuit • digital Phase Locked Loop (PLL) • clock detection circuit • digital-to-analog conv erter • CPU MUX bus interface • si[...]

Page 740 of 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 System clock specificat ion and chara cteristics Since the accuracy requirements for CC ITT and EIA Stratum 3 are different, it is necessary to have two TCVCXOs which feature different values of frequency tuning sensitivit y. See Table 238. EIA/CCITT compli[...]

NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Page 741 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation without software interventi on. If both re ferences are out of specification, the clock controller provides ho ldover. Autorecovery and cha tter If the command “track to primary” is gi ven, the clock contro ller tracks to the primary reference and co[...]

Page 742 of 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Holdover and free-run In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal , or when sudden changes occur on the incoming re ference due to error bursts, the clock controller provides a stable holdover. Free-run mode is initiated when the clock co[...]

NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Page 743 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation backplane line. It designates the DTI/PR I motherboard as a primary refe rence source. The secondary reference is ob tained from another DTI/PRI card, which is designate d by a technician. No o ther clock sources are used. External timing interface The c[...]

Page 744 of 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 745 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 762 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 746 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: Clocking slips can occur between MG 1000S systems th at are clocked from different Central Offices (COs) if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. Physical description The NTAK79 uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer printed[...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 747 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation RED On (Red) A red alar m state has been detected. This represents a local alar m state of: Loss of Carrier (LOS) Loss of F rame (LF AS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). Off No red (local) alarm. YEL On (Y ellow) A yellow alar m state h as been detecte d. This repre[...]

Page 748 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NTAK79 switches The NTAK79 card incorporates four on-bo ard dip switches. The tab les that follow provide infor mation on the various settin gs and related functions of these switches. Note: The ON positio n for all the switches is tow ards the bottom of the card. This is[...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 749 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 165 NTAK79 card with switch locations 12 12 12 12 553-7869.EPS LEDs Jack Faceplate Switch 1 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 2 NTAK79[...]

Page 750 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Switch SW1 – DCHI Configuration This switch enables/disables the on-board DCHI and sets the operating mode of the DCHI. DPNSS1 m ode is not su pported at this time. Fo r all other countries that do not use DPNSS, use Q.931 mode. Switch SW2 – Carrier Impedance Configur[...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 751 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Switch SW4 – Carrier Shield Grounding This switch enables for the selective groun ding of the Tx / Rx pairs of the carrier cable. Closing the switch (do wn position) app lies Frame Ground (FGND) to the coaxial car rier cable shield, creat ing a 75 ohms unbalanced co[...]

Page 752 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI • transmission of remote alarm when instructed • slip-buffering receive messages • supporting National and Int ernational bits in time slot 0 • on-board clock controller • onboard D-channel int[...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 753 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be directed to padding control. The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface circuitry. The DS-30X timeslot number is mapped to the PCM-30 channel number. Timeslots [...]

Page 754 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Signaling interface The signaling interface consis ts of the A07 DS-30X si gnaling controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link through the DS-3 0X timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length. Carrier interface The E1 interface connection t[...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 755 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Impedance matching The line interface provides fo r the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by a switch, as shown in Table 245. Note: The ON positio n for all the switches is tow ards the bottom of the card. This is [...]

Page 756 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 requirements of the CCITT recomm endation G.742. This provides jitter attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequenc y range from about 6 Hz to 6 KHz. Transmitter functions The transmitter takes the bi nary (dual unipolar) data fr om the PCM transceiver and p[...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 757 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • receive clock output • transmit clock output The receive and transmit clocks have sl ightly different bi t rates from each other, as determined by the tr ansmit and receive carrier clocks. The NTAK79 has an onboard D-Channel Handler Interface (D CHI). It is the [...]

Page 758 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Card-LAN interface A Dual Port UART handles the fun ctions of the serial ports for t he Card-LAN serial link and the echo can celler/test port interface. The echo/test interface is an asynchronous 4800 bps 8-bit connected to port A of th e UART. The Card-LAN interface is [...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 759 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation If the incoming clock reference is stab le, the internal clock con troller will track it, lock onto it, and match frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however, environmental circumstances will cause the external or internal clocks to drift. When this happens, th e inter[...]

Page 760 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • jitter filterin g • use of an algorithm to detect crystal aging and to qu alify clocking information Reference sw itchover Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference failure. When performance of the refe rence degrades to a point where th[...]

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 761 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation A time-out mechanism prev ents chatter due to rep eated automatic switching between primary and secondary reference sources. Holdover and free-r un In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal , or when sudden changes occur on the incoming re ference[...]

Page 762 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 763 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 768 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 764 of 906 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Inte rface daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 — system parameters are service changeable (system parameters are downloaded from software) — incoming Layer 3 message valida tion procedures are implemented in the D-PORT f irmware — supported message unit s and inform ation elements can [...]

NTAK93 D-channel Ha ndler Interface dau ghterboard Page 765 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Faceplate LEDs NTAK09 1.5 Mb PRI and NTBK50 2.0 MB PRI cards LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09 and NTBK50 cards. The DCHI LED is dual-color (red and gr een). The LEDs are described in Table 248. Power consumption Power consumpt[...]

Page 766 of 906 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Inte rface daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 DMA controller A Z80A-DMA chip controls the data transfer between local RAM memory and communication ports. The DMA cha nnels are only used in the receive direction (from line to SS C), not in t he transmit di rection. Random Access Memory (RAM)[...]

NTAK93 D-channel Ha ndler Interface dau ghterboard Page 767 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The port will operate at: The address of ports is se lected by hardwired back plane card address. Port characteristics and LAPD paramet ers are downloaded from software. D-Port — SDTI/PRI interface Below is a brief description of sign als.[...]

Page 768 of 906 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Inte rface daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 769 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 772 NTBK22 MISP card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 770 of 906 NTBK22 MISP card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Refer to ISDN Basic Rat e Interface: Inst allation and Co nfiguration (553-3001-218) and ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Features (553-3001-3 80) for additional information. Functional description Each MISP can support 4 line cards (U ILC or SILC or any combination of the two). Each[...]

NTBK22 MISP card Page 771 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation High-Level Data Link Controller (HDLC) The HDLC is a format converter that supp orts up to 32 serial channels that communicate at speeds up to 64 kbps. The HDLC converts mess ages into the following two message form ats: • a serially transm itted, zero-insert ed, CRC prote[...]

Page 772 of 906 NTBK22 MISP card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 773 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 784 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 774 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in th e MG 1000S. The card is not supported in the MG 1000S Expansion. Note: Clocking slips can occur between MG 1000S systems th at are clocked from different Central Of fices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The slip[...]

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 775 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 166 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card with daughterboards NTAK20 Clock Controller NTAK93 or NTBK51 D-Channel Interface SW2 SW4 1 2 1 2 SW1 1 2 Stiffeners Connector Sockets LEDs Bantam Jacks Standoffs DIS ACT RED YEL LBK CC DCH RCV XMT On Off On Off On Off 553-7872 553-CSE[...]

Page 776 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The LEDs are described in Table 249. Ta b l e 2 4 9 NTBK50 faceplate LEDs (Part 1 of 2) LED State Definition OOS On (Red) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is disab led or out-of-ser vice. Also , the state of the card after power-up , completion of self test, and exiting[...]

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 777 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Power requirements The NTBK50 obtains its power from th e backplane, drawing up to 2 A on +5 V, 35 mA on +1 5 V and 20 mA on –15 V. Environment The NTBK50 meets all applicable Nortel operating specifications. Functional description NTBK50 provides the followi ng fea[...]

Page 778 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI • transmission of remote alarm when instructed • slip-buffering receive messages • support of National and Internati onal bits in timeslot 0 • clock controller daugh terboard • D-channel interf[...]

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 779 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation message format; eight are assigned t o voice/data (64 Kbps ), one to signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps). The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be directed to padding control. The signal ing bits are extracted and [...]

Page 780 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Signaling interface The signaling interface consis ts of the A07 DS-30X si gnaling controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling li nk via the DS-30X timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length. Carrier interface For the E1 interface, the co nnec[...]

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 781 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Impedance matching (Switch SW2) The line interface provides fo r the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by SW2, as shown in Tab le 251. Note: The ON position for all th e switches is toward the bottom of the card. T[...]

Page 782 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Carrier Shield groundin g (Switch SW4) Table 253 lists the Carrier Shield ground switch settings. Note: The usual method is to ground th e outer conductor of the receive coax signal. Receiver functions The receiver extracts data an d clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inve[...]

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Pag e 783 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation CEPT transceiver The transmitter and receiver functions ar e used for synchronization, channel, and signal extraction. The functions m eet applicable specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.703 and G.732. The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.0[...]

Page 784 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 mode, which is not supported at this time. The DDCH supports only a single port which directly interfaces to th e PRI motherboard. See Table 254. Card-LAN interface A Dual Port UART handles the fun ctions of the serial ports for t he Card-LAN serial link test port interfa[...]

Page 785 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 790 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 786 of 906 NTBK51 Downloada ble D-channel Handl er daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 — DCH inter face — layer 3 preprocessor — traffic reporting including link capacity Physical description The NTBK51 daughterboard interfaces w ith the system C PU and is mounted on either the NTAK09 1.5 DTI/PRI card or the NTBK50 2 Mb [...]

NTBK51 Downloadable D-ch annel Handler daughterboard Page 787 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Functional description The main functional b locks of th e NTBK51 architecture include the following: • Microprocessors •M a i n m e m o r y • Shared memory • EPROM memory • Flash EPROM memory •E E P R O M m e m o r y • Seri[...]

Page 788 of 906 NTBK51 Downloada ble D-channel Handl er daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Main memory The main 68EC020 system memory is comprised of 1 Mbyte of SRAM and is accessible in 8 or 16 bits. The software , base code and application reside in main RAM and is dow nloaded from the so ftware through th e shared memory. Share[...]

NTBK51 Downloadable D-ch annel Handler daughterboard Page 789 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Sanity timer A sanity timer is incorporated on the DDCH to prevent the MPU from getting tied-up as the result of a hardware or software fault. If the MPU encounters a hardware or software fault and ent ers a continuous loop, the sanity ti[...]

Page 790 of 906 NTBK51 Downloada ble D-channel Handl er daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 download depends on the result of the check m ade by the CPU on the MSDL base code and application software. If a forced download enable command is execut ed in LD 96, the MSDL base code and application are forced down to the DDCH card, even[...]

Page 791 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 810 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 792 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The cards are identified by a two-letter suffix to the product co de called the vintage. The card vintage is based on whether PPM is equipped or not, and the individual countries where the card is being installed. The cards listed below are minimum vin [...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 793 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Physical description The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards have eight units. Each unit connects to th e shelf backplane through an 80-pin connector. The backplane is cabled to th e I/O panel which is then cabled to the cross-c[...]

Page 794 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 • provide 4 dB dynamic attenuation pads on a per call basis • allow individual units or th e entire board to be disabled by software • provide software selectable A- law or µ-law compandin g • indicate self-test status during an automatic or ma[...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 795 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Call placed by Central Office The Central Office initiates a call by applying ringing between the tip and ring wires. If the call is answered, the ringing detector on the trunk card is switched out and a low resistance dc lo op is placed between the[...]

Page 796 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Electrical specifications Power requirements Table 256 shows the power requir ements for the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards. Note 1: Analog cir cuitry is pow ered with +/-1 2 V generated fr om +/-15 V. The maximum current imbal[...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 797 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Pad switching The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards support the Nort h American loss plan . Software configuration allows the selection of 4 dB loss pads on a per unit basis. Note: The tolerance for the above nomin al values i[...]

Page 798 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 167 NTCK16 Central Office trunk co nnections for NT8D37 I/O pa nel connectors A, E, K, R Pi n s Pai r Col or I / O P a ne l Conne c tor Uni t Num be r AE KR 26 1 W-BL BL-W Unit 27 2 W-O O-W 0 28 3 W-G G-W Unit 29 4 W-BR BR-W 1 30 5 W-S S-W S L S [...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 799 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 168 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors B, F , L, S Pi n s Pa i r Co l o r I/ O P a ne l C onne c t or U ni t Nu mb er B FLS 26 1 W-BL BL-W Unit 27 2 W-O O-W 0 28 3 W-G G-W Unit 29 4 W-BR BR-W 1 30 5 W-S S-[...]

Page 800 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 169 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors C, G, M, T Pi n s Pai r Co l o r I/ O P a ne l C onne c tor U ni t Nu m b er CG M T 26 1 W-BL BL-W Unit 27 2 W-O O-W 4 28 3 W-G G-W S S S S Unit 29 4 W-BR BR-W L O L O L [...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 801 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation NTCK16AX Central Office trunk card Route Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown. LD 16 – Route Data Block for NTCK16AX. Prompt Re sponse Description REQ: NEW Define a new unit TYPE: CO T Define a new Route Data Block CUST xx Customer [...]

Page 802 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Trunk Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown: LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16AX . (Part 1 of 2) Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new trunk unit TYPE: CO T Central Office T runk TN T er minal Number l s c u F ormat for Lar[...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 803 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: These prompts are required only for the first unit defined on each NTCK16AX card. PPID Freq Min pulse detect ion 03 16Kz>70ms 04 12Kz>70ms Country BTID Cadence Brazil, Tortola10250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off Mexico10250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off Mexi[...]

Page 804 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NTCK16BX Central Office trunk card Route Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown: LD 16 – Route Data Block for NTCK16BX. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new unit. TYPE: CO T Define a new Route Data Bloc k. CUST xx Customer nu[...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 805 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Trunk Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown: LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16BX. (Part 1 of 2) Prompt Response Des cription REQ: NEW Define a new trunk unit. TYPE: CO T Central Office T runk TN T er minal Number l s c u Format for[...]

Page 806 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note 1: These prompts are required only for the first unit defined on each NTCK16BX card. (DIP) DTN Digitone sig naling, (digipulse) (P10) P1 2 P20 Make-break ratio f or pulse dialing speed. LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16BX. (Part 2 of 2) Prompt [...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 807 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation BTID values by country Country BTID Cadence Brazil Tortola10250 m s +/- 50 ms on/off Mexico 10 250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off Mexico 8 375 ms o n/off Singapore11 750 ms on/o ff Ireland 3 500 +/- 50 ms on/off Ireland 9 375 - 750 ms on/off Kuwait, Chile 6500[...]

Page 808 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Detection limits Pulses detected by the NTCK16AX circuit card must be w ithin the following limits: Busy tone detect Busy tone is sent by the Central Office to indicate the release of an established call. Detection limits The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX gener[...]

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Pag e 809 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Therefore the followi ng steps must be followed when the Generic XFCOT is installed: 1 Define Loss Switching mode. Respond to the prompts in LD 97 as shown. 2 Define Loss Switching Class Of Service. Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown. LD 97 ?[...]

Page 810 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Equivalencies The following equivalencies do apply: • XFCOT COT SHL is equivalent with XUT COT TRC • XFCOT COT LOL is equivalent with XUT COT NTC. The entries TRC and NTC will no lo nger be allowed f or the Generic X FCOT. Trunk to Trunk connection [...]

Page 811 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 824 NTDK20 Small System Controller card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 812 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 The NTDK20GA SSC card has the follo wing components and features: • NTTK25 daughterboard Flash memory, NTAK19 SIMM mo dule (16 MB) DRAM, and Backup memory Note: The NTTK13 daughterboard is still supported. • up to two 100BaseT IP daughterboards • two PC[...]

NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 813 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 170 NTDK20 SSC card and expansion dau ghterboard in the Call Server Ports 1 & 3 for 100BaseT daugh terboard Flash ROM Drive PCMCIA Drive Connector for 2n d 100BaseT daughterboard. MG 1000S systems 1 and 3 Ports 2 and 4 for Media Gateways 2 and [...]

Page 814 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Memory The majority of system and customer co nfigur ed data is both cont rolled and stored on the NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash ROM. An active and backup copy of customer data is also kept on the Flash ROM. In the event of data loss, the NTDK 20 SSC card also re[...]

NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 815 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 100BaseT IP daughterboards A 100BaseT IP Daughterboard mounted on the NTDK20 SSC card enables the connection of the Call Server to a MG 1000S. See Figure 170 on page 813 . Each daughterboard increases the number of confer ence channels by 32. The maximum [...]

Page 816 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 171 NTDK83AA dual-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard Figure 172 NTDK99A single-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard[...]

NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 817 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Note: If not connecting point-to -point , connect the Call Server and MG 1000S using a straight-through Et hernet UTP Cat 5 cable. Call Servers can be connected to MG 1 000S systems in the following ways: • Use 100BaseT to connect to the LAN for voice d[...]

Page 818 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 173 Call Server connection to Media Gateway 1000S systems For further information or install ation instructions, refer to the Communication Server 1000S : Installation and Configuration (553-3031-210). PC card interface The NTDK20 SSC card has a PC car[...]

NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 819 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Security device The NTDK20 SSC card in each MG 100 0S must contain a NTDK57DA Security device, a remote dongle (NT_Rem) which is keyed to match the NTDK57AA Security device on the Call Server and a standard dongle (NT_STD). This maintains the requir ement[...]

Page 820 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 SDI ports The NTDK20 SSC card in both the Call Server and the MG 1000S systems contains three SDI ports used to connect on-site termin als or remote termin als through a modem. Table 260 shows the po rt default settings. Conferencing Thirty-two conference cha[...]

NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 821 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The MG 1000S 10BaseT po rt can run in Normal mode or Su rvival mode. In Normal mode, the MG 1000S does not provide access to maintena nce or alarm management. External connections to the 10BaseT por t are provided by a 15-pin connecto r located on the bac[...]

Page 822 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Ta b l e 2 6 1 MG 1000S and MG 1000S Expansion slot assignments MG 1000S/MG 1000S Expansion First Second Th ird Fo urth Phys ical card slot Logical card slot Physical card slot Logical card slot Phys ical card slot Logical card slot Physical card slot Logical[...]

NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 823 o f 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 174 MG 1000S slots Media Gateway 1000 553-AAA1991[...]

Page 824 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 175 MG 1000S Expansion slots 553-AAA1992 Media Gateway 1000 and Media Gateway 1000 Chassis Expansion[...]

Page 825 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 838 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 826 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 To provide CEMUX communication with th e card, changes are also required to create an I/O entry for the card. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in th e MG 1000S. The card is not supported in the MG 1000S Expansion. Up to four digital trunk s are support[...]

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 827 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 176 NTRB21 TMDI card with clock controller O O S AC T R ED YEL LBK C C D C H RCV XMT NTRB21 TMDI SW ON 1 2 3 4 DCH F/W LEN 0 LEN 1 Len 2 553-CSE9024 Stiffeners NTAK93/51 Clock Controller Mounting Holes Connector Socket Connector Pins LEDs Bantam Jacks Stan[...]

Page 828 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 In general, the first five LED s operate as follows: • During system power up, the LEDs are on. • When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times, then go into their appropriat e states, as shown in Table 262. Figure 177 on page 829 show[...]

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 829 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 177 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate 55 3-C SE0 007 OOS AC T RE D YEL LB K CC DC H TM D I Monit o r Po r t RS232 MA INT Rx Tx[...]

Page 830 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Foreign and surge voltage protection Lightning protectors must be installed be tween an external T1 carrier facility and the system. For p ublic T1 facilities, this protection is provided b y the local operating company. In a private T1 facility en vironment (a camp[...]

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 831 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software description Changes from the NTAK09 are required for the new trunk card and License parameters are n service change and maintenance overlays. There is a change to CardLAN to introduce a new CardLAN ID. Th e download of PSDL data is also changed to handle[...]

Page 832 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 178 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate TMDI Rx Tx OOS ACT RED YEL LBK CC DCH .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... MAINT RS232 Monitor Port[...]

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 833 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Microprocessor The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the following ma jor tasks: • Task handler: also referred to as an executive. The task handler provides orderly per-channel task execution to m aintain real-time task ordering cons[...]

Page 834 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 D-channel interface The D-channel interface is a 64 kbps, full- duplex, serial bit- stream configured as a Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (D CE) device. The data signals include: • receive data output • transmit data input T abl e 263 Digital pad val ues and[...]

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 835 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • receive clock output • transmit clock output The bit rate of the receive and transmit clocks can vary slightly from each other. This is determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks. Feature selection th rough software co nfiguration for the D -chan[...]

Page 836 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Cross-connect – Level 1 (DSX-1), or LD -1. Equalizers are switch selectable through dip-switches. The settings are sh own in Table 264. Receiver The receiver extracts data and clock fr om an incoming data stream and outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst ca[...]

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 837 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Connector pinout The connection to the external digital carrier is through a 15 position Male D-type connector. NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard Digital Trunking requires synchronized clo cking so that a shift in one clock source results in an equivalen[...]

Page 838 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: Clocking slips can occur between MG 1000S systems th at are clocked from different COs, if th e COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. Clock rate convert er The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL synchronize[...]

Page 839 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 844 NTVQ01xx Media Card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 Hardware architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 840 of 906 NTVQ01xx Media Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 179 NTVQ01xx Media Card The NTVQ01xx Media Card provides faceplate and back plane interfaces, which are used to connect external LA Ns. This section provides information on the faceplate conn ectors and indicators.[...]

NTVQ01xx Media Card Page 841 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Hardware architecture The Media Card comes in two versi ons: 8-port and 32 -port. Faceplate connectors and indicators Figure 180 on page 842 shows the NTVQ01xx Me dia Card faceplate. Reset switch The reset switch on the faceplate manually resets the Media Card. Status LED[...]

Page 842 of 906 NTVQ01xx Media Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 180 NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate HEX Display Maintenance Port Ethernet Activity LEDs PCMCIA Slot Reset Button MC Enable LED Lock Latches J2 A: 100 10 A E T Reset NTVQ01AA 553-MIRAN0001[...]

NTVQ01xx Media Card Page 843 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation RS-232 Asynchronous Maint enance Port An 8-pin mini-DIN socket on the NT VQ01xx Media Card faceplate provides access to the RS-232 port. This faceplate port can provide access to the Media Card for OA&M purposes. The maintena nce port is also available through a femal[...]

Page 844 of 906 NTVQ01xx Media Card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 845 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 850 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 846 of 906 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description Figure 181 on page 847 shows the ITG-P card f aceplate components. The information in this section de scribes the components. Faceplate components NWK The faceplate connector labeled NWK is a 9-pin, sub-miniature D-type connector. The connector i[...]

NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card Page 847 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 181 NTVQ55AA ITG-P card faceplate Note: There are no Ethernet status LEDs for the ELAN management interface. ITG-P NWK NTVQ55AA NWK Status Reset Maint Port A: 553-CSE9150 Ethernet Voice Port ITG-P LED (card status) NWK LEDs (Ethernet) Reset Switch Type III PC[...]

Page 848 of 906 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 NWK Status LED NWK Status LEDs display the TLAN interface card Ethernet activity: • Green – on if the carrier (link pulse) is received from the TLAN interface card Ethernet hub. • Yellow – flashes when there is TL AN interface card data activity. During heavy t[...]

NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card Page 849 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • alternate connection to th e serial maintenance port DS -30X • Card LAN interfaces DS-30X voice/ signaling DS-30X carries Pulse Code Modul ation (PCM) voice and proprietary signaling on the backplane betw een the ITG-P card and the SSC. Card LAN Card LAN carri[...]

Page 850 of 906 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 851 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 868 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 852 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Each system can accommodate up to ei ght ESDI cards, for a total of 16 synchronous ports per system. The ESDI cards can be housed in the netwo rk slots of any of the following modules: • NT5D21 Core/Netw ork module (slo ts 0 through 7) • NT6D39 CPU[...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 853 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 182 CPC513 ESDI card front panel LED Card lock latch Card lock latch 553-5981 CSL/ ESDI Q P C 5 1 3 ENB DIS J1 J2 ESDI port 2 connector ESDI port 1 connector Enable/disable switch[...]

Page 854 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description The QPC513 ESDI card is an intelligent, two -port synchronous serial data interface card. See Figure 183. The tw o serial input/output data ports terminate on DB-25 connectors on the front panel of the card. Each port operates in[...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 855 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation The QPC513 ESDI card is an intelligent con troller. The local micro-processor performs all of the overhead associated with synchronous data transfer. The system processor passes data to the ESDI card processor a byte at a time using conventional mem[...]

Page 856 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Clock timing option The ESDI card offers two timing options: • Internal: The ESDI card uses an in ternal timing source to synchronize data transfers to the external device. • External: The ESDI card accepts a ti ming source from the high-speed inte[...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 857 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Fault detection Firmware on the ESDI card detects hardwa re faults on t he card and link lev el LAPB protocol faults. It reports the faults to the CPU when predetermined thresholds (downloaded at initializatio n) have been exceeded. Fault isolation [...]

Page 858 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Electrical interfa ce options Interface options are selected by inserti ng jumper plugs into the appropriate sockets on the card: • RS-232-C interface: The EIA RS-232-C interface can be used for speeds up to 19.2 kbps and d istances of less than 15.2[...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 859 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Connector pin assignments Table 268 shows the pin assignments for J1 and J2 when the p ort is configured for RS-232-C interface, and Table 269 on page 860 shows the pin assignments for J1 and J2 when th e port is configured for the high-speed interf[...]

Page 860 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 17 Receiver signal element timing (DCE) — 3 DD 24 T ransmitter signal element timing (DTE) 3 — DA Ta b l e 2 6 9 Connector J1 and J2 pin assignment s – high-speed interface (Part 1 of 2) Pin numb er Signal func tions Signal source EIA circuit (le[...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 861 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Timing 12 T ransmitter signal element tim- ing (DTE) – lead B — 3 DD (B) 14 T ransmitter signal element tim- ing (DCE) – lead B — 3 DB (B) 15 T ransmitter signal element tim- ing (DCE) – lead A — 3 DB (A) 17 T ransmitter signal element t[...]

Page 862 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuring the ESDI card Configuring the ESDI card consists of setti ng the port addresses using the address selection switch and setting the port in terface options using the jumper blocks. The system software must then be configured to recognize the[...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 863 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation DTE/DCE mode ju mper settings The interface for each ESDI port is conf igured independently. Ports must be configured both for electrical interf ace (RS-232-C or high-speed) and mode (DTE or DCE). With the proper options set: • An ESDI port config[...]

Page 864 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 185 ESDI card option sw itch locations 553-5983 S1 S2 DS1 J1 J2 UB9 UB10 UB11 UB12 UA9 UA10 UA11 UA12 UB16 UB17 UB18 UB19 UA16 UA17 UA18 UA19 Address selection Note: Ports 1 and 2 shown with jumper plugs installed for DCE and RS-232-C operation.[...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 865 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software service changes All of the other ESDI port operating parameters are defined in software and downloaded to the assigned ESDI port. See Table 266 on page 85 5 . These changes are made using the Configuration Record pro gram (LD 17). Instructi[...]

Page 866 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 parameters. These parameters must be set for each ports if both ports are being used. LD 17 – Serial port configura tion parameters . Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change configuration. TYPE: CFN Configuration type. IO TB YES Change input/outp[...]

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 867 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Applications The QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data In terface card is used any time that a high-speed, fully synchronous serial data com munication channel is n eeded. The ESDI card is typically used to connect to the following: • Meridian Mail • A ho[...]

Page 868 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 186 QPC513 ESDI card cabling Cables to peripherals NT8D95 cables (Note 1) NT8D82 cables I/O panel Module front Q P C 5 1 3 J1 J2 Port 2 Port 1 Card front panel Backplane Filter adapters (Note 2) Meridian Mail Meridian Link : 553-5984 Note 1: Thi[...]

Page 869 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 884 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

Page 870 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 QSDI cards are housed in the following modules: • NT5D21 Core/Netw ork module (slo ts 0 through 7) • NT6D39 CPU/Network module (slo ts 1 through 9, and 13) • NT6D60 Core module (slots 0 through 5) • NT8D35 Network module (slots 5 through 13 ) • N[...]

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 871 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 187 QPC841 QSDI card front panel LED Card lock latch Card lock latch 553-5985 ENB DIS J1 J2 Ports 2, 3, and 4 connector (non-standard) Port 1 connector (RS-232C) Enable/disable switch QPC841 QSDI[...]

Page 872 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Functional description The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card contains all the logic for four asynchronous serial ports, including th e baud rate generators. These serial ports are directly accessed by the syst em processor using memory reads and write[...]

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 873 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Figure 188 QPC841 QSDI card block diagram UART no. 1 UART no. 2 UART no. 3 UART no. 4 UARTs Address decode logic TD RD TD RD TD RD TD RD RS-232-C drivers and receivers Clock and bit rate select logic Processor bus 553-5986 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 J1[...]

Page 874 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Connector pin assignments Connector J1 is connected to port one, and uses the RS -232-C standard DB-25 pinout. Connector J2 is connected to ports two, three, and four, and is a non-standard pinout that requires an adapter cable. An adapter cable (NT8D96) s[...]

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 875 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation T abl e 274 Connector J2 pin assignments (Part 1 of 2) Pin Number Po r t Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode 1 FGD F rame ground F rame g round 2 TD T ransmitted data T ransmitted data 3 RD Received data Rece ived data 4 RTS Req uest to send [...]

Page 876 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Configuring the QSDI card Configuring the QSDI card consists of setting these option switches for each serial port: • Port addr ess • Baud rate • DTE/DCE mode Figure 189 on page 880 shows the location of the option switch es on the QSDI card. Instruc[...]

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 877 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation select the addresses for ports 1 and 2. Switch SW15 is used to select the addresses for ports 3 and 4. T abl e 275 QSDI card address s witch settings SW14 Po r t 1 Po r t 2 Switch setting s SW15 Po r t 3 Po r t 4 12345678 Device pair addresses 0 1 off o[...]

Page 878 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Baud rate switch se ttings Table 276 lists the switch settings necessary to set the b aud rate. Ta b l e 2 7 6 QSDI card baud rate switch settings Baud rate P ort 1 – SW10 P ort 2 – SW11 Port 3 – SW12 Po r t 4 – SW13 1234123412341234 150 off off on[...]

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 879 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation DTE/DCE mode switch sett ings Table 277 shows the DTE/DCE mode sel ection switches for the four serial ports. Test switc h setting Switch SW16 is only used for factory testing; all of its switches must be set to OFF for proper operation. T abl e 277 QSD[...]

Page 880 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Figure 189 QSDI card option sw itch locatio ns 553-5987 SW1 DS1 J1 J2 SW16 12 34 O N 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 34 O N 56 12 3 4 O N 12 34 O N 123 4 O N 12 34 O N 12 3 4 O N 56 78 12 34 O N[...]

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 881 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Software service changes Once the QPC841 QSDI card has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configur ed to recognize it. This is done using the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions fo r running the Configuration Reco[...]

Page 882 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Applications The QPD841 Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) card is used to connect the switch to a variety of communication d evices and peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to any of the four serial ports. The standard application f[...]

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 883 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation • SDI multiple-port cable (inter nal system options use only) —N T 8 D 9 0 • SDI I/O to DTE/DCE cables (system options use only) —N T 8 D 9 5 Note: This cable is available in dif ferent lengths. Refer to Equipment Identif ication (553-3001-154) [...]

Page 884 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

Page 885 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 900 The TDS/DTR card Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 886 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Features Tone transmitter The TDS/DTR tone transmitter provides 30 channels of tone transmission. Up to 256 tones are available as u-La w or A-Law and up to 256 bursts and cadences are downloaded from the CPU. The TDS/DTR card does not provide the Music on Hold feature as do ot[...]

The TDS/DTR card Page 887 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Tones and cadences The following tables give the tones and cadences provid ed by the NTAK03 TDS/DTR card. T abl e 278 NT AK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 µ-La w tones and cadence (Part 1 of 6) To n e # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload Precision Ringing To n e s DTMF Digits MF Digit[...]

Page 888 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 19 770/1340 -12/-10 5 20 770/1480 -12/-10 6 21 850/1210 -12/-10 7 22 850/1340 -12/-10 8 23 850/1480 -12/-10 9 24 940/1340 -12/-10 0 25 940/1210 -12/-10 * 26 940/1480 -12/-10 # 27 700/1630 -12/-10 Fo 28 770/1630 -12/-10 F 29 850/1630 -12/-10 I 30 reser ved 31 reser ved 32 reser [...]

The TDS/DTR card Page 889 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 39 770/1210 -17/-15 4 40 770/1340 -17/-15 5 41 770/1480 -17/-15 6 42 850/1210 -17/-15 7 43 850/1340 -17/-15 8 44 850/1480 -17/-15 9 45 940/1340 -17/-15 0 46 940/1210 -17/-15 * 47 940/1480 -17/-15 # 48 700/1630 -17/-15 Fo 49 770/1630 -17/-15 F 50 850/1630 -17/-15 I 51 reser v[...]

Page 890 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 60 700/1500 -13/-13 7 61 900/1500 -13/-13 8 62 1100/1500 -13/-13 9 63 700/1700 -13/-13 ST3P/RB/ C11 64 900/1700 -13/-13 STP/C12 65 1100/1700 -13/-13 KP/CR/KP1 66 1300/1700 -13/-13 ST2P/KP2 67 1500/1700 -13/-13 ST/CC 68 400 -11 ÷ 69 400 -14 ÷ 70 400 x 50 -14 ÷ 71 (533 + 666) [...]

The TDS/DTR card Page 891 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 80 480 -19 ÷ 81 420 -9 ÷ 82 440 -29 ÷ 83 reser ved 84 350/440 -17/-17 ÷ 85 400/450 -17/-17 ÷ 86 400 -17 ÷ 87 1400 -26 ÷ 88 950 -12 ÷ 89 1400 -12 ÷ 90 1800 -12 ÷ 91 470 0 ÷ 92 940 0 ÷ 93 1300 0 ÷ 94 1500 0 ÷ 95 1880 0 ÷ 96 350/440 -10/-10 97 TBD 98 TBD 99 TBD 1[...]

Page 892 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Note: Tones #1 - 16 (i nclusive) and #234 - 24 9 (inclusive) are included for Norwegian and Malaysian specifications. 101 600 -19 ÷ 102 800 -19 ÷ 103 1400 -23 ÷ 104 820 -7 Ta b l e 2 7 9 NT AK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (P art 1 of 9) To n e # Frequency ([...]

The TDS/DTR card Page 893 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 12 940 X 1210 -14/-13 * 13 940 X 1480 -14/-13 # 14 700 X 1630 -14/-13 F0 15 770 X 1630 -14/-13 F 16 850 X 1630 -14/-13 I 17 1400 -37 89 940/1630 -13/-12 P 90 700/1210 -13/-12 1 91 700/1340 -13/-12 2 92 700/1480 -13/-12 3 93 770/1210 -13/-12 4 94 770/1340 -13/-12 5 95 770/148[...]

Page 894 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 104 850/1630 -13/-12 I 105 350/440 -17/-17 ÷ 106 400/450 -17/-17 ÷ 107 1400 -26 ÷ 108 440 -23 ÷ 109 420 -9 ÷ 110 950 -12 ÷ 111 1400 -12 ÷ 112 1800 -12 ÷ 113 940/1630 -12/-10 P 114 700/1210 -12/-10 1 115 700/1340 -12/-10 2 116 700/1480 -12/-10 3 117 770/1210 -12/-10 4 11[...]

The TDS/DTR card Page 895 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 125 940/1480 -12/-10 # 126 700/1630 -12/-10 F0 127 770/1630 -12/-10 F 128 850/1630 -12/-10 I 129 350/440 -22/-22 ÷ 130 400 -19 ÷ 131 400 -25 ÷ 132 400/450 -22/-22 ÷ 133 1400 -15 ÷ 134 950 -19 ÷ 135 1400 -20 ÷ 136 1800 -20 ÷ 137 420 -19 ÷ 138 940/1630 -18/-17 P 139 7[...]

Page 896 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 146 850/1340 -18/-17 ÷ 8 147 850/1480 -18/-17 ÷ 9 148 940/1340 -18/-17 ÷ 0 149 940/1210 -18/-17 ÷ * 150 940/1480 -18/-17 ÷ # 151 700/1630 -18/-17 F0 152 770/1630 -18/-17 F 153 850/1630 -18/-17 I 154 (533 + 666) X 10 -23 ÷ 155 (533 + 666) X 20 -23 ÷ 156 400 -12 ÷ 157 820[...]

The TDS/DTR card Page 897 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 167 1700 -19 ÷ 168 440 -14 ÷ 169 380 -8 ÷ 170 1400 -32 ÷ 171 820 -7 P 172 850 -8 1 173 420 -32 2 174 reser ved 3 175 420 -6 4 176 420 -2 5 177 1020 -13 6 178 1800 -17 7 179 1400 -23 8 180 950 -29 9 181 1400 -29 0 182 1800 -29 * 183 950 -22 # 184 470 0 F0 185 940 0 F 186 [...]

Page 898 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 188 420 X 25 -17 189 950 -16 190 950 -25 191 940/1630 -9/-7 192 700/1210 -9/-7 193 700/1340 -9/-7 194 700/1480 -9/-7 195 770/1210 -9/-7 196 770/1340 -9/-7 197 770/1480 -9/-7 198 850/1210 -9/-7 199 850/1340 -9/-7 200 850/1480 -9/-7 201 940/1340 -9/-7 202 940/1210 -9/-7 203 940/1[...]

The TDS/DTR card Page 899 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 209 420 -4 210 1400 -18 211 1400 -9 212 350/420 -9/-9 213 420 -14 214 450 -12 215 450 -22 216 820 -16 217 350/420 -14/-14 218 940/1630 -14/-12 219 700/1210 -14/-12 220 700/1340 -14/-12 221 700/1480 -14/-12 222 770/1210 -14/-12 223 770/1340 -14/-12 224 770/1480 -14/-12 225 85[...]

Page 900 of 906 The TDS/DTR card 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 230 940/1480 -14/-12 231 700/1630 -14/-12 232 770/1630 -14/-12 233 850/1630 -14/-12 234 940 X 1630 -17/-15 p 235 700 X 1210 -17/-15 1 236 700 X 1340 -17/-15 2 237 700 X 1480 -17/-15 3 238 770 X 1210 -17/-15 4 239 770 X 1340 -17/-15 5 240 770 X 1480 -17/-15 6 241 850 X 1210 -17/[...]

Page 901 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation 906 Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol Contents This section contains inform ation on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

Page 902 of 906 Appendix A: LAPB Da ta Link Control protocol 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 LAPB subset of the HDLC protocol and transm itted serially to the line at a rate determined by the download ed parameters. The QPC513 card receives data serially from the line, packaged in LAPB information frames. Afte r determining th at a block is [...]

Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol Page 903 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation LAPB balanced class of procedure Applications which use ports on the QPC513 are automatically designate d as BAC, 2, 8 (for examp le, balanced operation, asynchro nous balanced mode class of procedure with optional functi ons 2 and 8 implemented). [...]

Page 904 of 906 Appendix A: LAPB Da ta Link Control protocol 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 Asynchronous Ba lanced Mode Asynchronous Balanced Mode (ABM) is a balanced, configured operational mode in which either combined statio n may send commands at any time and may initiate certain response fram e transmissions wi thout receiving permissi[...]

Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol Page 905 of 906 Circuit Card Description and Installation Description of procedure The basic LAPB procedures must be implemented to satisfy the following: • standard use of the poll/final bit (for more information, see ISO-4375-1979-[E]) • exception condition reporting and recovery implemented in acco[...]

Page 906 of 906 Appendix A: LAPB Da ta Link Control protocol 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005[...]

[...]

F amily Produc t Manual Contac ts Copyright FCC not ice T rademar ks Document number Pr oduct release Document rel ease Date Pub lish Nor tel Communication Ser ver 1000 Cir cuit Car d Description and Installation Copyright © Nor tel Networks Limited 2005 All Rights Reserved Information is subject to change without notice. Nor tel Networks reser ve[...]